{"title":"Patio \u0026 Outdoor Living","description":"\u003cp\u003eTurn your garden into a true extension of the home with our \u003cb\u003ePatio \u0026amp; Outdoor Living UK\u003c\/b\u003e department, which brings together furniture, shelter and comfort for relaxing outside. It is designed for households who eat, chat and unwind outdoors from the first warm weekend of spring to the last mild evening of autumn. Whether you have a compact balcony or a wide terrace, the aim is the same: a space that feels comfortable, sheltered and inviting. Planning the patio as one room, rather than buying pieces at random, gives a far more pleasing result.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFurniture covers aluminium sling patio sets, a drop leaf prep table, a floor-standing electric patio heater and a cotton hammock on its own steel stand. Structures include Palram Canopia privacy curtains and LED lighting for gazebos and patio covers, plus a Sunvilla louvred wall panel for electric pergolas. We are also building out sheds, greenhouses, parasols, rattan sets, sun loungers and storage boxes so the whole patio can be planned in one place.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach item is listed with accurate dimensions, materials and power ratings, so you can check that it suits your space before buying. Prices are set to compare well with other UK furniture and garden retailers, and every page is reviewed for accuracy. As a trusted UK seller, we are glad to help you combine shade, seating and warmth into a layout that works for your household.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGood outdoor living is about comfort as much as looks. Explore Patio \u0026amp; Outdoor Living at Garden N Outdoor and create a space you will use all year.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"palram-palermo-gazebo-curtain-set","title":"Palram Canopia Curtain Set for Palermo Gazebos, Four UV Resistant Privacy Curtains","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Canopia Curtain Set for Palermo Gazebos\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese Palram Palermo gazebo curtains are a four-panel privacy set for owners of a Palram Canopia Palermo patio cover who want to close in their seating area on demand. Draw them for a secluded outdoor room shielded from neighbours, or tie them back and let the breeze roll through. Each black curtain clips onto the gazebo's existing track line, so the cover becomes a flexible space you can shape around the weather and the occasion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHidden Hooks Beat Clumsy Curtain Rings\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGeneric gazebo drapes hang from oversized rings or ties that snag, sag and never quite match the frame. Palram designed this set specifically for the Palermo range, with newly designed hidden hooks that clip onto the track line and glide smoothly along it. Zips join neighbouring curtains so the whole perimeter can be closed, and corner post tiebacks secure them neatly open. The fabric is UV resistant, which matters on a structure that spends every summer day in direct sun, and there is no fiddly upkeep because the curtains are machine washable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat Palram Palermo Gazebo Curtains Add\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFour full curtains:\u003c\/strong\u003e together they enclose the entire gazebo for complete privacy on every side.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHidden clip hooks:\u003c\/strong\u003e glide smoothly along the Palermo track so opening and closing takes one easy pull.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZips and corner tiebacks:\u003c\/strong\u003e link panels into a sealed room or hold them back for airflow and a partly open setup.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMachine washable fabric:\u003c\/strong\u003e comes clean in the washing machine after pollen season, with no other maintenance needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGazebo Curtain Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurtain Set for Palermo Gazebos\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 curtains\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUV resistant fabric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFixings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHidden clip hooks for gazebo track lines\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClosures\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eZips between curtains, corner post tiebacks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia Palermo patio covers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCare\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine washable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePatio cover or gazebo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Patio Hosts Who Value Privacy\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClose the side facing next door for a relaxed family lunch, then open everything as the evening cools and friends arrive. The set turns a Palermo cover into an adaptable garden room for reading, dining or simply hiding from the wind.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCurtain Sets on the Shelf\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis Palram Canopia curtain set is in stock at Garden N Outdoor, ready for prompt UK arrival after you order.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will the curtains fade or wear out in strong sun?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: They are made from UV resistant material intended for outdoor use, which helps them cope with long hours of summer light. Washing them in the machine every so often keeps dust and pollen from building up on the fabric.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will this curtain set fit my gazebo?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It is designed for Palram Canopia Palermo patio covers, with hooks that clip onto and run along the Palermo track lines. Please note the gazebo or patio cover itself is not included in this set.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How quickly will the curtain set reach me?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Your order is processed promptly and handed to a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival. We email tracking details once the parcel is on its way, so you know when to expect it.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram Canopia","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67896652071208,"sku":"Item #639758","price":133.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-canopia-palermo-gazebo-curtain-set-swift-uk-dispatch-1.webp?v=1792145876"},{"product_id":"palram-canopia-led-lighting-system","title":"Palram Canopia LED Lighting System for Patio Covers, Gazebos and Greenhouses","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Canopia LED Lighting System\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram gazebo LED lighting system is a purpose-made, low heat light system for owners of Palram Canopia patio covers, gazebos and greenhouses who want evenings outdoors to last longer. It attaches beneath the structure's main profiles and spreads a soft, diffused glow across the space below. Dinner can stretch past sunset, a late game of cards needs no torch, and the greenhouse becomes usable after work during the darker months.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy Integrated Lighting Outshines Clip-On Strings\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClip-on string lights droop, tangle in the wind and leave extension leads trailing across the patio. Battery lanterns fade within an hour. Palram's system takes a tidier route: a slim aluminium profile connects to the bottom of any or all of the main profiles on your structure, and both the integrated transformer and the cables stay hidden from sight. The light is diffused rather than harsh, and the LEDs run with low heat, so the area underneath stays comfortable. Energy efficient operation keeps running costs modest across a whole season of long evenings.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHighlights of the LED System\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDiffused LED glow:\u003c\/strong\u003e spreads pleasant, even light over a table or seating area without glare in your eyes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLow heat output:\u003c\/strong\u003e stays comfortable overhead, even on warm summer evenings beneath the roof panels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAluminium profile:\u003c\/strong\u003e fixes neatly to the underside of the main profiles and looks like part of the original structure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConcealed transformer and cables:\u003c\/strong\u003e keep wiring out of sight for a clean, finished look with no loose leads.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Gazebo LED Lighting Details\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLED Lighting System\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight source\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLED, diffused\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLow heat\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEfficiency\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEnergy efficient\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProfile\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium, fixes under main profiles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated transformer and cables, hidden from view\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia patio covers, gazebos and greenhouses\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInstallation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEasy to install\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePatio cover or structure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePerfect for Evening Entertainers and Keen Growers\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFit it under an existing Palram patio cover and the terrace turns into a dining room once the sun goes down. Inside a Palram greenhouse, the same soft light makes evening potting and watering possible after a full working day.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOn Our Shelves Today\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGarden N Outdoor holds this Palram Canopia LED lighting system in stock, sent out with rapid mainland delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will the LED lights get hot under the roof?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: No. Palram describes it as a low heat lighting system, and the LEDs give a pleasant diffused light rather than a hot, harsh glare. That makes it comfortable to sit beneath for a long evening outdoors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Which Palram structures does the lighting fit?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It connects to the Palram Canopia range of patio covers, gazebos and greenhouses. The aluminium profile attaches to the bottom of one or all of the main profiles, and the transformer and cables stay concealed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How long will delivery of the lighting kit take?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch promptly and the kit travels by rapid mainland delivery through a dependable courier service. You receive tracking information as soon as it leaves our warehouse, so you can plan your installation.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram Canopia","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67896652103976,"sku":"Item #639763","price":38.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-canopia-led-patio-lighting-system-rapid-mainland-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145876"},{"product_id":"sunvilla-fixed-louvred-wall-panel","title":"Sunvilla Fixed Louvred Wall Panel 2.3 x 2.8m, Matt Grey Aluminium for Electric Pergola","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSunvilla 7ft 6\" x 9ft 2\" (2.3 x 2.8m) Fixed Louvred Wall Panel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Sunvilla fixed panel is an aluminium louvred pergola wall panel for owners of the Sunvilla Full Electric 3m x 4m Pergola including LED who want shelter on one side without losing light. Its angled slats break up gusts and screen overlooking windows while air and daylight still filter through. The result is a calmer, more private outdoor room that stays usable when the wind picks up or the evening turns cool.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLouvres Outperform Solid Screens and Fabric Drops\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA solid wall panel traps heat and makes a pergola feel boxed in, while fabric side drops flap in the breeze and fade within a few summers. Sunvilla's fixed louvres strike a better balance: they block direct weather and prying eyes, yet let fresh air and light pass through. The frame is high-quality powder-coated aluminium in a contemporary matt grey, the same modern finish found on the pergola it is built to partner. At H 229 x W 281 x D 6 cm it fills a full side, and aluminium will not rot or need repainting like timber screens.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy This Panel Earns Its Place\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePowder-coated aluminium:\u003c\/strong\u003e provides a rigid, weather-ready frame that needs no staining, painting or seasonal treatment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFixed louvred design:\u003c\/strong\u003e angled slats balance privacy and wind protection with steady ventilation and filtered daylight.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMatt grey finish:\u003c\/strong\u003e matches the contemporary look of the Sunvilla pergola for a coordinated, built-in appearance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFull-side coverage:\u003c\/strong\u003e measures 229 cm high and 281 cm wide, enough to screen one complete side of the structure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAluminium Louvred Pergola Wall Panel Measurements\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunvilla\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFixed Louvred Wall Panel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMatt grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 229 x W 281 x D 6 cm (7ft 6in x 9ft 2in)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBoxed dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 52.5 x W 237 x D 14 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e54.4 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGross weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60.3 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunvilla Full Electric 3m x 4m Pergola including LED\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCare\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClean with a soft damp cloth, dry with a soft cloth, no bleach or abrasives\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Garden Entertainers in Exposed Spots\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMount it on the windward or overlooked side and your pergola becomes a sheltered space for dinners, drinks and quiet reading in all kinds of weather. An occasional wipe with a damp cloth is all the panel asks for between gatherings.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePanels Ready to Leave the Warehouse\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Sunvilla louvred wall panel is in stock at Garden N Outdoor and goes out with swift UK dispatch.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How do I keep the aluminium panel looking new?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Clean it with a soft damp cloth, then wipe it over with a soft dry cloth. Avoid bleach and abrasive cleaners, which can dull the powder-coated matt grey finish. Aluminium will not rot, so no painting is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Which pergola is this louvred panel designed for?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It is made for use with the Sunvilla Full Electric 3m x 4m Pergola including LED. The panel measures H 229 x W 281 x D 6 cm and weighs 54.4 kg net, so two people should handle it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: When will my panel be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Because the box measures 237 cm long, it is booked with a dependable courier service for heavy items and leaves us with swift UK dispatch. We send tracking details so you can arrange help for unloading.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Sunvilla","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67896652136744,"sku":"Item #586596","price":398.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/sunvilla-louvred-pergola-wall-panel-fast-tracked-uk-transit-1.webp?v=1792145877"},{"product_id":"sunvilla-helio-sling-patio-set-4pc","title":"SunVilla Helio 4 Piece Sling Patio Set with Cover, Aluminium Frame in Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSunVilla Helio 4 Piece Sling Patio Set + Cover\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe SunVilla Helio is a four-piece aluminium sling patio set for households that want comfortable outdoor seating without soggy cushions or rust. A loveseat, two armchairs and a coffee table arrive with a protective cover, giving a complete terrace in one order. Breathable Phifertex sling seats dry quickly after rain, so you can be back outside soon after a shower passes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy Sling Seating Outperforms Cushioned Sets\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ePadded garden sofas soak up every downpour and stay damp for days, while bare steel frames can start shedding rust after a season or two. Helio takes a lighter route. Its frame is made entirely from rust-resistant aluminium, finished with a durable powder coat for weather protection. Phifertex Premier sling fabric lets air circulate, dries quickly and resists fading, mildew and stretching. Faux wood armrests stay cool to the touch even in direct sunlight, and the matching faux wood coffee table measures H 45.5 x W 111.5 x D 65.5cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStandout Features of the Helio Set\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAluminium frame:\u003c\/strong\u003e lightweight enough to rearrange easily, yet sturdy and rust-resistant for everyday outdoor use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBreathable Phifertex sling:\u003c\/strong\u003e air flows through the seat to keep you cooler, and the fabric dries quickly after rain.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCool-to-the-touch arms:\u003c\/strong\u003e faux wood armrests add warmth and texture without heating up in direct sun.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProtective cover included:\u003c\/strong\u003e shield the whole set when it is not in use to keep it cleaner between seasons.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAluminium Sling Patio Set Measurements\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunVilla\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCollection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHelio\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium frame, Phifertex sling fabric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeats\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSet Includes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 armchairs, 1 loveseat, 1 coffee table, 1 cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArmchair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 88.5 x W 71 x D 77cm, 8.3kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoveseat\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 88.5 x W 130.5 x D 77cm, 13.3kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoffee Table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 45.5 x W 111.5 x D 65.5cm, 11.3kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 90 minutes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFrom Morning Coffee to Late Supper\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart the day with a cup on the faux wood table, then gather friends on the loveseat as the evening cools. Low upkeep means more time actually relaxing in the garden and far less time drying cushions or scrubbing rusty frames.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable for Immediate Order\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHelio sets are in stock at Garden N Outdoor and leave our warehouse for quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will the frame rust if the set stays outside all summer?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The frame is made from rust-resistant aluminium with a powder-coated finish for weather protection. Using the included cover when the set is not in use will help keep the frame and Phifertex slings clean through changeable British weather.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How long does assembly take, and how heavy are the pieces?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Average assembly time is about 90 minutes. The armchairs weigh 8.3kg each, the loveseat 13.3kg and the coffee table 11.3kg, so the set is easy to rearrange on a patio or deck.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How soon will the Helio set be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Garden N Outdoor ships this set with quick UK delivery via a dependable courier service. You will receive tracking details once it is on its way, making it easy to plan the first evening outdoors.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"SunVilla","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67896653807912,"sku":"Item #1807229","price":498.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/sunvilla-helio-4-piece-sling-patio-set-cover-quick-uk-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145918"},{"product_id":"zest-drop-leaf-garden-table","title":"Zest Garden Drop Leaf Table, Pizza Oven Prep Station with Hooks and Casters","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eZest Garden Drop Leaf Table\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Zest Garden Drop Leaf Table is a pizza oven table for outdoor cooks who need a sturdy station for prep, cooking and serving. Its spacious central worktop is designed to hold pizza ovens and larger outdoor cooking equipment, while two fold-up side leaves add room for dough, toppings and plates. Heavy-duty casters let you roll it into position, then tuck it away when the party is over.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA Proper Pizza Oven Table Beats a Wobbly Trestle\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBalancing a heavy pizza oven on a folding picnic table or an old trestle is asking for trouble, and it leaves nowhere to stage ingredients. Zest designed this table in the UK specifically for the job. The central worktop takes the oven, the drop leaves open the table from 99cm to 201cm wide, and the lower shelving keeps drinks, plates and dishes off the ground. Integrated heavy-duty casters support a total load of 220kg. It is made from sustainably sourced wood with a premium water-based stain in light pebble grey for enhanced durability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHighlights for Outdoor Cooks\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpacious central worktop:\u003c\/strong\u003e designed to hold pizza ovens and other small garden appliances steady while you cook.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTwo fold-up side leaves:\u003c\/strong\u003e extend the table to 201cm wide for preparing dough and serving slices, then fold down to 99cm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRail with three hooks:\u003c\/strong\u003e keeps peels, tongs and other utensils hanging within easy reach of the oven.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeavy-duty casters:\u003c\/strong\u003e support a total load of 220kg and let you reposition the station on solid, level ground.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePizza Oven Table Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eZest\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrop leaf table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSustainably sourced wood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePremium water-based stain, light pebble grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 98 x W 201 x D 93cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClosed Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 98 x W 99 x D 93cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCaster Load Capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e220kg total\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStorage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLower level shelving, utensil rail with 3 hooks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat packed for self-assembly, instructions included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlease Note\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePizza oven not included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA Sociable Hub for Garden Gatherings\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWith 360-degree access, friends can gather round to add toppings while you slide pizzas in and out of the oven. Outside of pizza season it works just as well as a potting bench or a stylish garden bar, so it earns its place all year.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOrder Your Station Today\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Zest Drop Leaf Table is in stock at Garden N Outdoor and sent with rapid mainland delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is the table strong enough for a heavy pizza oven?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The worktop is designed to hold pizza ovens and larger outdoor cooking equipment, and the heavy-duty casters support a total load of 220kg. Use it on a solid, level surface and lock the oven in a stable central position before lighting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Which pizza ovens will fit, and is assembly required?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The closed table measures H 98 x W 99 x D 93cm, so check your oven's footprint against the central worktop. It arrives flat packed for self-assembly with clear instructions included. Please note the pizza oven itself is not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How quickly will the table be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Garden N Outdoor sends this table by rapid mainland delivery with a dependable courier service. You will receive tracking once it has been collected, so you can plan your first pizza evening.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Zest","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67896653840680,"sku":"Item #637824","price":288.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/zest-drop-leaf-pizza-oven-garden-table-rapid-mainland-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145923"},{"product_id":"kettler-kalos-ibiza-patio-heater-1800w","title":"Kettler Kalos Ibiza 1800W Floor Standing Patio Heater with LED Light and Speaker","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKettler Kalos Ibiza Floor Standing Garden Heater with LED \u0026amp; Wireless Speaker\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Kettler Kalos Ibiza is an 1800W electric patio heater with speaker and LED light, built for patios, terraces and covered seating areas. It stands 110cm tall on a freestanding base, so you can place warmth exactly where guests sit. A wireless speaker connects to your phone, and a remote control handles both heat and light, turning one slim black column into heating, lighting and music.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOne Electric Patio Heater with Speaker Replaces Three Gadgets\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGas patio heaters need bottles swapping and storing, and a separate lamp plus a portable speaker soon clutters the table with cables and chargers. Kettler combines the lot. The Kalos Ibiza delivers an 1800W heat output from a mains supply via a 1.8m power cable, with an integrated LED light and a wireless speaker built into the same column. It is IP55 rated for outdoor conditions and measures just H 109 x W 32 x D 32cm. At 7.9kg it is light enough to move between seating areas whenever plans change.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFeatures That Keep the Evening Going\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e1800W heat output:\u003c\/strong\u003e takes the chill off cooler evenings so guests can stay outside long after sunset.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIntegrated LED light:\u003c\/strong\u003e adds a gentle glow to the patio without needing a separate lamp or string lights.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWireless speaker:\u003c\/strong\u003e connects to your phone so you can play music straight from the heater column.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRemote control:\u003c\/strong\u003e adjust heat and light from your seat without getting up to reach the unit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePatio Heater Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKettler\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKalos Ibiza\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElectric patio heater\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeat Output\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1800W\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLighting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated LED light\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAudio\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWireless speaker, connects to a phone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eControl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRemote control for heat and light\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProtection Rating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIP55\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower Cable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 109 x W 32 x D 32cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.9kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Hosts Who Love Late Nights Outdoors\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSwitch on the heat as the sun drops, dim the light to suit the mood and queue a playlist from your phone while dinner is served. Because it is floor standing, you can move it from the dining set to the lounge corner as the evening shifts.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLive Stock Ready to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Kettler Kalos Ibiza is in stock at Garden N Outdoor now and reaches customers with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can the heater stay out on the patio?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It is IP55 rated and designed for outdoor spaces such as patios, terraces and covered seating areas. For a longer life, bring it in or store it under cover during prolonged wet weather and keep the power connection protected.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How does the speaker connect, and what powers the heater?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The wireless speaker connects to your phone, while the heater runs from a mains supply through its 1.8m power cable. A remote control switches the 1800W heat and the integrated LED light on and off.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: When will my patio heater arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Garden N Outdoor sends the Kalos Ibiza with quick UK delivery through a dependable courier service. Tracking details follow once it has left us, so you know when to expect warmer evenings.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Kettler","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67896653906216,"sku":"Item #681630","price":113.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/kettler-kalos-ibiza-1800w-led-patio-heater-prompt-uk-arrival-1.webp?v=1792145923"},{"product_id":"vivere-cotton-hammock-steel-stand-9ft","title":"Vivere 9 ft Double Cotton Hammock with Steel Stand and Premium Carry Bag","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVivere Cotton Hammock with Steel Frame and Premium Carry Bag (9 ft)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Vivere 9ft set is a double cotton hammock with stand for anyone who wants an instant spot to unwind without hunting for two sturdy trees. The breathable cotton bed offers room to spread out alone or share with someone, while the powder-coated steel stand supports it on a deck, patio, lawn or campsite. A carry bag means the whole set can travel with you.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy a Stand Beats Tying to Trees\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTree-hung hammocks depend on finding two healthy trunks the right distance apart, and straps can mark the bark. Rope hammocks also dig into your back after a few minutes. Vivere avoids both problems. The hammock is made from soft, breathable cotton with strong polyester end strings for longevity, and the included steel stand is powder coated with a rust-resistant finish. The hammock measures 200 x 150cm, the stand footprint is 249 x 109 x 104cm, and the combo has a weight capacity of 204.12kg, all at a total weight of 14kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReasons to Stretch Out in a Vivere\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDouble hammock:\u003c\/strong\u003e enough room for solo lounging or sharing the cotton bed with a friend or partner.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBreathable cotton fabric:\u003c\/strong\u003e soft, durable material that stays comfortable on warm afternoons and lasts for seasons.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePowder-coated steel stand:\u003c\/strong\u003e rust-resistant finish supports the hammock on decks, patios, lawns and campsites.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarry bag included:\u003c\/strong\u003e pack the set for holidays, beach trips or moving it around the garden.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDouble Cotton Hammock with Stand Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVivere\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHammock with stand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLength\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e9ft set\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHammock Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCotton with polyester end strings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStand Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHammock Size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 x 150cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStand Footprint\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e249 x 109 x 104cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight Capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e204.12kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e14kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncludes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble cotton hammock, steel stand, carry bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMade for Lazy Weekends and Long Evenings\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSet it up on the lawn on Saturday morning and it becomes the favourite place for reading, napping or watching the sky. Because assembly is quick and the bag is included, it can follow you to the campsite or a friend's garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock Now\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Vivere double hammock and stand set is in stock at Garden N Outdoor and ships with swift UK dispatch.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How much weight can the hammock and stand hold?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The combo has a stated weight capacity of 204.12kg, which suits one person spreading out or two people sharing. The cotton bed uses strong polyester end strings, and the stand is powder-coated steel for durability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How easy is the stand to put together?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Vivere describes assembly as hassle-free, letting you go from package to relaxing in minutes. The stand has a footprint of 249 x 109 x 104cm, so measure your deck, patio or lawn space before choosing a spot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: When will my hammock set arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Garden N Outdoor sends this set with swift UK dispatch through a dependable courier service. You will receive tracking details once it is on its way, so you can plan your first lazy afternoon.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Vivere","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67896654364968,"sku":"Item #541008","price":88.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/vivere-9ft-cotton-hammock-with-steel-stand-quick-uk-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145934"},{"product_id":"infinity-x1-string-lights-2-pack","title":"Infinity X1 500 Lumen Rechargeable String Lights 2 Pack with USB-C, 7.9m","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInfinity X1 500 Lumen Rechargeable String Lights, 2 Pack\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Infinity X1 two-pack gives campers and garden party hosts rechargeable string lights for camping, gazebos and patios, with no disposable batteries to buy. Each unit pairs a 500-lumen string light with a versatile area light. Unroll up to 7.9m of glow around a tent, an awning or a fence, choose a mode, then recharge over USB-C when the night is done.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRechargeable String Lights Over Throwaway Cells\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheap battery fairy lights fade by mid-evening and leave a pile of spent AA cells behind. Infinity X1 uses an integrated rechargeable battery, so each charge is cheaper and creates no battery waste. Two units in the box means two separate zones of light: one inside the tent, one over the picnic table. Multiple modes adjust brightness, colour and ambience, from bright task lighting while you cook to a soft glow later on. The ABS and PP case rolls the string up neatly and folds its handle away, so nothing tangles in the kit bag.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLight Where You Want It\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e500-lumen output:\u003c\/strong\u003e Bright enough for pitching, cooking or clearing up after dark, then dimmable for relaxed evenings outside.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e7.9m string length:\u003c\/strong\u003e Drape 26 feet of lights along a gazebo frame, tent ridge or garden fence for even, wide coverage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUSB-C charging:\u003c\/strong\u003e Top up from a power bank, car socket or mains outlet, so a weekend away never ends in darkness.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRoll-up case:\u003c\/strong\u003e An extendable case with a collapsible handle stores the string tidily and carries easily between pitch and car.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLighting Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInfinity X1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 rechargeable string light units\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrightness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500 lumens per string light\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtra light\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVersatile area light on each unit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eString length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e26ft \/ 7.9m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBuilt-in rechargeable battery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCharging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUSB-C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMultiple brightness, colour and ambience settings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eABS, PP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhite\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUnit size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameter 12.02 x 4.3cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.48kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTents, Awnings and Back Gardens\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHang one unit along the tent ridge for reading and the other across the awning for dinner, then roll both away in minutes when you strike camp. Between trips, they move to the garden fence or the patio parasol, adding a warm glow to summer barbecues and birthday evenings.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable Today\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInfinity X1 string lights are in stock at Garden N Outdoor, with quick UK delivery to your door.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Are these lights sturdy enough for regular camping trips?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The units are made from ABS and PP plastics and pack into an extendable roll-up case with a collapsible handle, designed for on-the-go use. Rolling the string away after each trip keeps the cable tidy and protected in the car or kit bag.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How do I charge the string lights?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Each unit has a built-in rechargeable battery that charges through USB-C. You can plug it into a power bank, a car USB socket or a mains USB adaptor, so it is easy to top up at home, in the car or on site.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How quickly will my lights arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Garden N Outdoor sends every order for quick UK delivery, packed carefully and handed to a dependable courier service. Tracking details follow by email once your parcel is on the move, so you know exactly when to expect it.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Infinity X1","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67896654823720,"sku":"Item #1872149","price":11.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/infinity-x1-rechargeable-string-lights-2-pack-quick-uk-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145946"},{"product_id":"bramblecrest-wisley-recliner-set-sage","title":"Bramblecrest Wisley 3 Piece Recliner Patio Set, Sage, Aluminium Frames \u0026 Padded Cushions","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBramblecrest Wisley 3 Piece Recliner Patio Set, Sage\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bramblecrest Wisley in sage is a reclining bistro set for couples and small-garden owners who want somewhere genuinely comfortable to sit outdoors. Two padded recliners and a matching table bring a calm, green tone to a patio or balcony. Lean back with a morning coffee, tilt upright for lunch, and enjoy a set built from powder-coated aluminium and seasonproof fabric.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy Aluminium and Eco Mist Outlast Cheap Sets\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBudget bistro sets tend to use bare steel that blooms with rust and cushions that soak up every shower. The Wisley takes a sturdier route. Its frames are powder-coated aluminium for strength and rust resistance, while the Eco Mist fabric is seasonproof and UV-resistant, so the sage colour holds through bright summers. Materials are frost resistant too. The tabletop is a tree-free wood-effect surface that gives the warmth of timber with none of the annual oiling, and each recliner weighs just 7.2kg, light enough to move into the evening sun.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReclining Bistro Set Comfort Points\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReclining chairs:\u003c\/strong\u003e Tilt back to properly unwind rather than perching upright, ideal for long, slow afternoons outdoors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGenerous padding:\u003c\/strong\u003e Thick cushions keep you comfortable from the first cup of tea to the last glass after sunset.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRemovable covers:\u003c\/strong\u003e Unzip and hand wash the covers whenever pollen, sun cream or a spilt drink leaves a mark.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWood-effect top:\u003c\/strong\u003e A low-maintenance tabletop that looks like timber and wipes clean after meals.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSet Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBramblecrest\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCollection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWisley\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSage green\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSet includes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x reclining chairs, 1 x table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated aluminium, rust resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCushion fabric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEco Mist, seasonproof and UV-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeather\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrost resistant materials\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTree-free wood-effect\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChair dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 102 x W 64 x D 57cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChair weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.2kg each\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10.5kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCushion care\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRemovable, hand-washable covers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA Quiet Corner for Two\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIts compact footprint suits a balcony, a small patio or a sheltered nook beside the flower beds where two people can share breakfast. Through the week it becomes the spot for an evening glass of wine, a paperback or a long phone call with the family.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady for Your Patio\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe sage Bramblecrest Wisley set is in stock at Garden N Outdoor, with quick UK delivery available now.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will the set cope with British weather?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The frames are powder-coated aluminium for strength and rust resistance, the Eco Mist cushion fabric is seasonproof and UV-resistant, and the materials are frost resistant. As with any garden furniture, storing cushions indoors during long wet spells will help them look their best.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How do I keep the cushions clean?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The cushion covers are removable and hand-washable. Unzip them, wash gently by hand and let them dry fully before refitting. The wood-effect tabletop needs only a wipe with a damp cloth, with no oiling or staining required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: When will the patio set arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Garden N Outdoor sends the Wisley set with quick UK delivery through a dependable courier service. Tracking details arrive by email once your order leaves us, so you can arrange to be home when it lands.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Bramblecrest","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67903100158248,"sku":"Item #633399","price":648.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/bramblecrest-wisley-3-piece-recliner-patio-set-quick-uk-arrival-1.webp?v=1792145952"},{"product_id":"bramblecrest-wisley-bistro-set-mocha","title":"Bramblecrest Wisley 3 Piece Recliner Bistro Set, Mocha, Rust-Resistant Aluminium Frames","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBramblecrest Wisley 3 Piece Recliner Bistro Set, Mocha\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis Bramblecrest Wisley mocha reclining bistro set is made for people who want proper lounging comfort on a compact patio. Two recliners with warm-toned, generously padded cushions sit beside a matching wood-effect table. Pour a drink, tilt back and watch the light fade over the lawn, knowing the aluminium frames and seasonproof fabric are designed to handle the British seasons.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLighter Frames, Longer Life\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCast iron sets chip and rust, while thin plastic chairs fade and crack after a couple of summers. Bramblecrest pairs powder-coated aluminium frames, chosen for strength and rust resistance, with seasonproof Eco Mist fabric that is UV-resistant. Each chair weighs 7.2kg, so moving it into the shade takes one hand, and frost resistant materials mean the set is ready again when spring arrives. The tree-free wood-effect tabletop delivers a timber look without sanding or staining every year.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMocha Reclining Bistro Set Details\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTilt-back seating:\u003c\/strong\u003e Recline for a doze in the afternoon sun, then sit upright again for lunch at the table.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV-resistant Eco Mist:\u003c\/strong\u003e The mocha cushions are made to hold their tone through long, bright days on a south-facing patio.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHand-washable covers:\u003c\/strong\u003e Zip off the covers after a barbecue, wash by hand and the cushions look fresh again.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRust-resistant aluminium:\u003c\/strong\u003e Powder-coated frames shrug off showers and keep their finish season after season.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe Numbers Behind the Set\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBramblecrest\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCollection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWisley\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBistro set\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMocha (beige)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContents\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x reclining chairs, 1 x table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCushions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeasonproof, UV-resistant Eco Mist fabric, generously padded\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTabletop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTree-free wood-effect\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChair size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 102 x W 64 x D 57cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChair weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.2kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10.5kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Slow Evenings and Small Spaces\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo seats and a compact table slot neatly onto modest decking, a courtyard or a city balcony without crowding it. It quickly becomes the place you carry your first coffee on a Saturday and return to after work with something cold.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOn the Shelf Now\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGarden N Outdoor has the mocha Wisley set in stock today, quickly shipped across the UK.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Are the recliners sturdy enough for daily use?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Each chair is built on a powder-coated aluminium frame chosen for strength and rust resistance, with generously padded cushions for all-day comfort. At 7.2kg per chair, they are light to move yet designed for regular, relaxed use throughout the outdoor season.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Does the tabletop need treating like real wood?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: No. The table has a tree-free wood-effect top, so it gives the look of timber without sanding, oiling or staining. A wipe with a damp cloth after meals keeps it tidy, and the frost resistant materials help it through colder months.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How soon can I expect delivery?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Your Wisley set is quickly shipped across the UK by Garden N Outdoor, travelling with a dependable courier service. We send tracking details by email once it leaves us so you can follow its progress to your door.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Bramblecrest","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67903100584232,"sku":"Item #633396","price":648.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/bramblecrest-wisley-recliner-bistro-set-mocha-swift-uk-dispatch-1.webp?v=1792145952"},{"product_id":"keter-rosewood-hosting-station","title":"Keter Rosewood Expandable Garden Hosting Station, Pull-Out Serving Space \u0026 Drinks Store","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeter Rosewood Expandable Garden Hosting Station\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Keter Rosewood is an expandable garden hosting station for anyone who loves having friends round for drinks, barbecues and buffets. Closed, it is a neat 112cm-wide shelving unit with a wood-look finish. Pull out the hosting extension and it stretches to 174cm, giving you a proper serving counter with a drinks store, preparation worktop and hidden wheels to roll it wherever the party goes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA Garden Hosting Station with Resin Toughness\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTimber bar carts swell, split and need staining every year, while folding tables wobble under a loaded tray of glasses. Keter uses DecoCoat technology to give resin the look and feel of real wood while keeping all the benefits of resin. A high-quality HPL preparation surface handles chopping, mixing and plating. The dedicated drinks storage keeps bottles organised and has a built-in tap for easy emptying, so there is no tipping out melted ice. At 28kg, it feels solid, yet the hidden wheels make moving it from the kitchen door to the patio easy.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHosting Features That Earn Their Place\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEasy-pull extension:\u003c\/strong\u003e Widens the unit from 112cm to 174cm in moments, adding room for platters, glasses and snacks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDrinks store with tap:\u003c\/strong\u003e Fill it with bottles and ice, then drain it through the built-in tap when the party winds down.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDrawer, shelf and container:\u003c\/strong\u003e The upper drawer, open shelf and inner container keep openers, napkins and skewers within reach.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHidden wheels:\u003c\/strong\u003e Roll the whole station to the patio, the lawn or poolside without unloading it first.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSize, Weight and Build\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKeter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCollection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRosewood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eResin with DecoCoat wood-look finish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorktop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHPL preparation surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClosed dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 90 x W 112 x D 43cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpen dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 90 x W 174 x D 43cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e28kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStorage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUpper drawer, open shelf, inner container, drinks store with built-in tap\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMobility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHidden wheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 45 minutes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor People Who Love Hosting\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDay to day it sits against the wall as a tidy shelving unit, then opens into a buffet table, cocktail bar and prep counter when guests arrive. Sunset drinks, birthday spreads and long Sunday lunches all run more smoothly when everything you need is in one place.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock for Summer Gatherings\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Keter Rosewood hosting station is in stock at Garden N Outdoor, sent by dependable courier service.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is the hosting station sturdy enough to use outdoors regularly?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It is made from resin with Keter's DecoCoat finish, giving a wood look with the practical benefits of resin, plus a high-quality HPL worktop for prep. At 28kg it feels solid, and hidden wheels let you move it under cover when you are not using it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How does the pull-out extension work?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The easy-pull hosting extension glides the shelves outwards, taking the unit from 112cm to 174cm wide while the height stays at 90cm. Push it back in when you are finished and it returns to a compact shelving unit. Assembly takes approximately 45 minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How long will delivery take?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Garden N Outdoor dispatches the Rosewood station via dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival. You will receive tracking details by email as soon as it is collected, so you can plan to be in when it reaches you.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Keter","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67903101927720,"sku":"Item #597593","price":268.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/keter-rosewood-expandable-hosting-station-quick-uk-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145954"},{"product_id":"keter-shed-shelving-kit-97cm","title":"Keter 97cm Shed Shelving Kit, 3 Adjustable Steel Shelves Holding 90kg","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeter 97cm Shed Shelving Kit, Black\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Keter 97cm shed shelving kit gives Keter shed owners nearly three metres of strong, flexible wall storage. Three extra-long steel-reinforced shelves lift cushions, paint tins, sprays and hand tools off the floor, so you stop digging through piles to find the trowel. You choose the height between shelves, and the whole system holds up to 90kg in total.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy a Shed Shelving Kit Beats Floor Piles\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFreestanding plastic racks wobble, eat valuable floor space and bow under a few tins of paint. This kit mounts to the shed wall on extra-durable, rust-resistant galvanised steel brackets and rails, with steel reinforced shelves rated to 30kg each. That puts storage above the mower and bikes rather than in their way. Each shelf measures W 97 x D 30cm, deep enough for garden furniture cushions and paint cans alike. The kit is designed to work with Keter sheds, except the Factor line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat the Steel Gets You\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVariable shelf height:\u003c\/strong\u003e Set the gap between each shelf to suit tall bottles, boxed seed trays or stacked plant pots.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGalvanised steel rails:\u003c\/strong\u003e Rust-resistant brackets and rails stay strong in a damp shed through every season.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e30kg per shelf:\u003c\/strong\u003e Steel reinforcement lets each shelf hold heavy items, totalling 90kg across the kit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNearly 3m of storage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Three 97cm shelves give a large amount of usable wall space in one box.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShelving Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKeter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShed shelving kit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 variable-height shelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 97 x D 30cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30kg per shelf, 90kg total\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRails and brackets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRust-resistant galvanised steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf construction\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel reinforced\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKeter sheds, except the Factor line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Gardeners Who Want a Tidy Shed\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFit the shelves at the start of the season and the shed instantly feels bigger, with cushions, compost bags and paint tins all visible at a glance. Weekend jobs start faster when every tool and tin has a home on the wall rather than on the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Keter 97cm shelving kit is in stock at Garden N Outdoor and leaves with swift UK dispatch.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How much weight can the shelves hold?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Each steel reinforced shelf can hold up to 30kg, giving a total capacity of 90kg across all three shelves. The rails and brackets are made from extra-durable, rust-resistant galvanised steel, so the kit is built for heavier shed items such as paint tins.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will this kit fit my shed?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It is designed for Keter sheds and works with Keter models except the Factor line. Each shelf is 97cm wide and 30cm deep, so check your shed's wall space before ordering. You choose the height of each shelf during installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How soon will the kit be dispatched?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Orders are packed by Garden N Outdoor and leave with swift UK dispatch, travelling by dependable courier service. Tracking details arrive by email once the parcel is on its way, so you can plan your shed makeover.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Keter","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67903111332136,"sku":"Item #449413","price":93.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/keter-97cm-shed-shelving-kit-3-steel-shelves-quick-uk-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145960"},{"product_id":"lifetime-shed-shelf-kit-60404","title":"Lifetime 3 Piece Shed Shelf Kit, Steel-Reinforced Black Shelves, Model 60404","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLifetime 3 Piece Shed Shelf Kit, Model 60404\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Lifetime 3 piece shed shelf kit, model 60404, is an accessory set for Lifetime shed owners who want pots, sprays and hand tools off the floor. It includes three steel-reinforced black shelves, steel support tubes, durable brackets and all the installation hardware. Fit it once and the shed's vertical space finally starts working, leaving room for the mower to roll straight in.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSteel Inside Where Cheap Shelves Bend\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnsupported plastic shelving starts to droop as soon as you load it with anything heavier than seed packets. These shelves are steel-reinforced for extra strength and sit on steel support tubes with durable brackets, so heavier items stay level without sagging. The low-maintenance materials are built to withstand tough outdoor conditions without rusting, warping or fading through damp winters and warm summers. Each shelf measures W 76 x D 25cm, and the kit is designed for a secure fit with Lifetime lawn and garden sheds.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShed Shelf Kit Highlights\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree shelves in one box:\u003c\/strong\u003e Enough storage for hand tools, garden chemicals and outdoor kit along a single shed wall.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel reinforcement:\u003c\/strong\u003e Supports heavier items without sagging, so tins and boxes sit flat and secure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHardware included:\u003c\/strong\u003e Everything needed for an easy, secure installation arrives in the box, with nothing extra to buy.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeather-resistant materials:\u003c\/strong\u003e Made to withstand tough outdoor conditions without rusting, warping or fading over time.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKit Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifetime\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60404\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContents\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 shelves, steel support tubes, support brackets, installation hardware\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 76 x D 25cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic, steel-reinforced\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible shed models\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60352, 60393, 60394, 60455, 60456, 60295U, 60305\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Lifetime Shed Owners Who Want Order\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMount the shelves along one wall and suddenly the watering cans, spray bottles and trowels all have a home you can see at a glance. Spring planting days start faster when you are not shifting boxes off the floor to reach the compost.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStocked and Ready\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Lifetime 60404 shelf kit is in stock at Garden N Outdoor, sent with fast-tracked UK transit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will the shelves sag under heavier tools?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The shelves are steel-reinforced for extra strength and are engineered to support heavier items without sagging. They sit on steel support tubes with durable brackets, and the materials are made to resist rusting, warping and fading in outdoor conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Which sheds does this kit fit?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Kit 60404 is designed for Lifetime lawn and garden sheds and works with models 60352, 60393, 60394, 60455, 60456, 60295U and 60305. Check your shed's model number before ordering to make sure the fit is right.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How soon will the shelf kit arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Garden N Outdoor sends your order with fast-tracked UK transit through a dependable courier service. You will receive tracking details by email once it leaves us, so you can plan your shed tidy-up.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lifetime","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67903112741160,"sku":"Item #627513","price":78.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/lifetime-3-piece-shed-shelf-kit-model-60404-swift-uk-dispatch-1.webp?v=1792145963"},{"product_id":"keter-tool-hanger-74cm","title":"Keter 74cm Multi-Purpose Tool Hanger for Keter Sheds, Holds 36kg","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeter 74cm Multi-Purpose Tool Hanger\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Keter multi-purpose shed tool hanger is a 74cm galvanised steel rail for gardeners who are tired of rakes sliding down the wall and landing on their shins. It holds long-handled tools such as rakes, shovels and brooms upright, apart and easy to grab. The rail supports up to 36kg in total, with each hook rated to 9kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHooks That Hold, Not Hooks That Bend\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSingle screw-in hooks pull out of thin shed panels and bend under the weight of a heavy spade. The Keter hanger spreads the load along one strong rail made from galvanised steel for extra strength. Each hook wears a resin coating, which protects handles and blades from scratches every time you hang them up. The hooks come in different shapes to suit different tools, and you can arrange them in whatever configuration suits your collection. It is designed to fit Keter sheds and installs easily.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy It Earns Its Wall Space\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMixed hook shapes:\u003c\/strong\u003e Rakes, shovels, brooms and other long-handled tools each find a hook that suits their shape.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustomisable layout:\u003c\/strong\u003e Arrange the hooks in any configuration so the tools you use most sit closest to the door.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e9kg per hook:\u003c\/strong\u003e Galvanised steel strength carries heavy spades and forks, up to 36kg across the rail.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eResin-coated hooks:\u003c\/strong\u003e A protective coating helps stop handles and blades getting scratched as you hang them up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShed Tool Hanger Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKeter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMulti-purpose tool hanger\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanised steel, resin-coated hooks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 31 x W 74cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBoxed dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 13 x W 73 x D 12.5cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e36kg total, 9kg per hook\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNet weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGross weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.6kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKeter sheds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Gardeners With Long-Handled Tools\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHang the rail just inside the shed door and every rake, broom and spade stays upright and ready, rather than tangled together in a corner. Clearing autumn leaves or digging a new bed starts with one easy grab instead of a clatter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable Today\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Keter 74cm tool hanger is in stock at Garden N Outdoor, delivered by dependable courier service.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How much weight can the tool hanger take?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The hanger supports up to 36kg in total, with each hook rated to 9kg. It is made from galvanised steel for extra strength, so it handles heavy garden tools such as spades, forks and shovels without the bending you get from single screw-in hooks.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will it work in my shed?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It is designed for Keter sheds and is easy to install. The rail measures H 31 x W 74cm, and the hooks can be arranged in any configuration, so measure the wall space you plan to use before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: When will my tool hanger arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Garden N Outdoor sends your order with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival. You will receive tracking details by email as soon as it leaves us, so you know when to expect it.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Keter","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67903113167144,"sku":"Item #552232","price":43.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/keter-74cm-shed-tool-hanger-holds-36kg-rapid-mainland-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145964"},{"product_id":"palram-stockholm-roof-blinds","title":"Palram Canopia Stockholm Patio Cover Roof Blinds, UV Resistant Shade in 6 Sizes","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Canopia Stockholm Patio Cover Roof Blinds\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese Palram Canopia Stockholm patio cover roof blinds are for owners of a Stockholm patio cover who want softer, cooler shade on long sunny days. The white, linen-like curtains clip beneath the roof and ease the sun's heat, making the space below far more pleasant for relaxing, dining and entertaining. Each set is UV resistant, wrinkle-free, mould-free and washable, and arrives with the gliders, hooks and bars needed to hang it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMade for the Stockholm Track\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGeneric shade sails sag, flap in the breeze and never quite line up with a patio cover frame. This set is designed specifically for the Stockholm Patio Cover profile track lines, with hooks that fit into click glider eyelets for a neat, secure fit. The linen-like fabric matches the high aesthetic of the Stockholm series rather than looking like an afterthought. Being UV resistant, the curtain is made for long hours under strong sunshine, and because it is washable you can freshen it up at the end of the season.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePatio Cover Roof Blinds Shade Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV resistant fabric:\u003c\/strong\u003e Helps ease the sun's heat during warm weather for a more comfortable seating area beneath.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWrinkle and mould-free:\u003c\/strong\u003e The curtain keeps a tidy look and resists mould, even through damp British spells.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClick glider fitting:\u003c\/strong\u003e 20 click gliders with eyelets and 20 plastic hooks run neatly along the profile track.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWashable curtain:\u003c\/strong\u003e Take the fabric down and wash it when pollen or dust builds up over summer.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRoof Blind Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoof blinds for patio cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhite\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFabric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLinen-like, UV resistant, wrinkle-free, mould-free, washable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShade curtain\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e340 x 64.5cm (134 x 25.4in)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFittings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 click gliders with eyelet, 20 plastic hooks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBars\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 white metal bars (1.9 x 60cm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Stockholm Patio Covers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSize options\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.4 x 3.7m, 3.4 x 5.2m, 3.4 x 5.9m, 3.4 x 6.6m, 3.4 x 7.4m, 3.4 x 8.1m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePatio cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Stockholm Patio Cover Owners\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOn a bright July afternoon, draw the blinds and the area beneath your Stockholm cover becomes a comfortable spot for lunch, reading or watching the children play. They turn a covered patio into a genuinely usable outdoor room through the hottest weeks of summer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eStockholm roof blinds are in stock at Garden N Outdoor in all six sizes, sent with swift UK dispatch.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will these blinds fit my patio cover?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: They are designed specifically for Palram Stockholm Patio Covers and their profile track lines, with hooks that fit into click glider eyelets. Choose the size option that matches your Stockholm cover. Please note that the patio cover itself is not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How do I clean the roof blinds?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The linen-like curtain is washable, wrinkle-free and mould-free. Unhook it from the click gliders, wash it following the care guidance supplied, then rehang it once dry. Regular cleaning keeps the white fabric looking fresh.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: When will my blinds arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Garden N Outdoor sends your order with swift UK dispatch through a dependable courier service. You will receive tracking details by email when it leaves us, so you can plan the fitting.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram Canopia","offers":[{"title":"3.4 x 3.7m","offer_id":67903114772776,"sku":"Item #639749","price":198.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.4 x 5.2m","offer_id":67903114805544,"sku":"Item #639753","price":278.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.4 x 5.9m","offer_id":67903114838312,"sku":"Item #639754","price":323.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.4 x 6.6m","offer_id":67903114871080,"sku":"Item #639755","price":348.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.4 x 7.4m","offer_id":67903114903848,"sku":"Item #639756","price":398.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3.4 x 8.1m","offer_id":67903114936616,"sku":"Item #639757","price":428.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-canopia-stockholm-patio-shade-blinds-quick-uk-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145968"},{"product_id":"palram-feria-patio-roof-blinds","title":"Palram Canopia Patio Cover Roof Blinds for Feria Covers, UV Resistant Shade, 4 Sizes","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Canopia Roof Blinds for Feria Patio Covers\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese Palram Canopia Feria patio cover blinds are white roof curtains for Feria owners who find the space beneath their cover too bright and warm in high summer. Hung under the panels, they ease the sun's heat and create a pleasant, shaded atmosphere for relaxing with family and friends. The linen-like fabric is UV resistant, wrinkle-free, mould-free and washable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMatched Shade Beats Makeshift Shade\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDraping an old sheet or a cheap shade sail under a polycarbonate roof never looks right, and it rarely stays where you put it. These blinds are designed for compatible Palram Canopia patio covers, specifically the Feria range, and their linen-like fabric matches the high aesthetic appeal of those covers. UV resistance makes them suitable for long days of sun exposure, while the wrinkle-free and mould-free fabric keeps a tidy finish. When it needs refreshing, the curtain is washable, so it stays bright season after season.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy Feria Owners Choose Them\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePurpose-made fit:\u003c\/strong\u003e Designed to work with Palram Feria Patio Covers rather than improvised from generic shade products.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV resistant:\u003c\/strong\u003e Built for days with long sun exposure, easing heat under the cover through summer.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWrinkle and mould-free:\u003c\/strong\u003e Keeps a neat, clean look even after spells of damp British weather.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWashable fabric:\u003c\/strong\u003e Take it down at the end of the season and wash it to keep the white fresh.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFeria Patio Cover Blinds Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoof blinds for patio cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhite\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFabric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLinen-like curtain fabric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProperties\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUV resistant, wrinkle-free, mould-free, washable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Feria Patio Covers\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSize options\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 x 3m, 3 x 4.3m, 3 x 5.6m, 3 x 6.2m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePatio cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Covered Patios in Full Sun\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA south-facing Feria cover can turn a terrace into a sun trap by early afternoon, and these blinds bring it back to a comfortable temperature for lunch outdoors. They make the covered space feel like a calm, shaded garden room that the whole family will actually use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable in Four Sizes\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFeria roof blinds are in stock at Garden N Outdoor in every size, quickly shipped across the UK.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will these blinds fit my Feria patio cover?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: They are designed to be compatible with Palram Feria Patio Covers. Choose the size option that matches your cover: 3 x 3m, 3 x 4.3m, 3 x 5.6m or 3 x 6.2m. Please note that the patio cover itself is not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can the curtain fabric be cleaned?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Yes. The linen-like fabric is washable, wrinkle-free and mould-free. Take the curtain down, wash it following the care guidance supplied and rehang it once fully dry, ready for another season of shade.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: When will my blinds be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Your order is quickly shipped across the UK by Garden N Outdoor using a dependable courier service. We email tracking details when it leaves us, so you can arrange to be home for delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram Canopia","offers":[{"title":"3 x 3m","offer_id":67903115493672,"sku":"Item #639742","price":178.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 x 4.3m","offer_id":67903115526440,"sku":"Item #639745","price":248.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 x 5.6m","offer_id":67903115559208,"sku":"Item #639746","price":348.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 x 6.2m","offer_id":67903115591976,"sku":"Item #639748","price":358.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-canopia-feria-patio-roof-blinds-rapid-mainland-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145970"},{"product_id":"lifetime-corner-shelf-kit-0110","title":"Lifetime Corner Shelf Kit 2 Pack, Weather Resistant Shed Shelves, Model 0110","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLifetime Corner Shelf Kit, 2 Pack, Model 0110\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Lifetime model 0110 kit is a pair of shed corner shelves for owners of Lifetime 7ft, 8ft, 10ft and 15ft wide outdoor storage buildings. Two black triangular shelves tuck into the awkward angles where walls meet, giving sprays, string, gloves and secateurs a proper home. Installation hardware is included, so they go up in minutes without stealing any usable wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCorner Thinking Beats Bulky Racks\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFull-width shelving swallows the wall space you need for tool hangers and hooks. These compact triangular shelves fill the corner instead, so storage grows while the open walls stay clear for long-handled tools. They are made from durable blow-moulded plastic, engineered for long-lasting performance without cracking, warping or fading, and they are weather resistant for life inside a garden building. Each shelf measures W 24 x D 24cm with a 24cm radius, a size that suits small bottles, plant labels and twine without jutting out into the walkway.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShed Corner Shelves Benefits\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpace-saving triangle:\u003c\/strong\u003e Fills unused corners and leaves the main walls clear for tools, hooks and larger shelving.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBlow-moulded plastic:\u003c\/strong\u003e Engineered to resist cracking, warping and fading for long-lasting use in a garden shed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHardware included:\u003c\/strong\u003e All the screws and fasteners come in the box for a hassle-free setup on the day it arrives.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeather resistant:\u003c\/strong\u003e Built to cope with the temperature swings and damp of an outdoor storage building.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKit Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifetime\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0110\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eContents\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 corner shelves, installation hardware\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelf size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 24 x D 24cm, 24cm radius\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlow-moulded plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProperties\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeather resistant, resists cracking, warping and fading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible sheds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifetime 7ft, 8ft, 10ft and 15ft wide outdoor storage buildings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot compatible\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVertical sided sheds, 11ft sheds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Lifetime Shed Owners Short on Wall Space\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ePut one shelf by the door for gloves and secateurs and another in the far corner for slug pellets and twine, and the clutter on the floor disappears. Small items finally stay where you can find them on a busy Saturday in the garden.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock Today\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Lifetime 0110 corner shelf kit is in stock at Garden N Outdoor, with rapid mainland delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will the shelves crack or warp over time?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: They are made from durable blow-moulded plastic engineered for long-lasting performance without cracking, warping or fading. The shelves are also weather resistant, making them well suited to the conditions inside a garden storage building throughout the year.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will this kit fit my shed?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The shelves are designed for all Lifetime 7ft, 8ft, 10ft and 15ft wide outdoor storage buildings. They do not work with vertical sided sheds or 11ft sheds, so check your Lifetime model before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How soon will the kit be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Garden N Outdoor sends the corner shelf kit with rapid mainland delivery through a dependable courier service. Tracking details arrive by email as soon as your order leaves us, so you can plan the installation.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lifetime","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67903115460904,"sku":"Item #627512","price":33.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/lifetime-corner-shelf-kit-2-pack-model-0110-quick-uk-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145970"},{"product_id":"fermob-bistro-3-piece-set-grey","title":"Fermob 3 Piece Bistro Set in Grey, Made in France, Galvanised Steel Table and 2 Chairs","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFermob 3 Piece Bistro Set in Grey\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Fermob bistro set pairs a compact grey table with two of the brand's iconic Bistro chairs, made for couples who want café-style coffee on a balcony, patio or kitchen corner. The chair design was born in 1889, the same year as the Eiffel Tower, and is still made in France at Fermob's historic Thoissey site. Seven curved steel slats give it the outline people recognise from pavement terraces worldwide.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy Cheap Bistro Sets Let You Down\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLow-cost metal sets often arrive with a thin paint finish that chips, then rust creeps in and the chairs start to wobble. Fermob starts with premium quality galvanised steel that is anti-corrosion treated, then adds a UV-resistant powder coating that protects the finish and keeps the grey colour uniform. Each chair has a 192kg load capacity. Narrow seat slats are less prone to water puddling after a shower, and the curved seat and back slats provide greater comfort than flat strips, so lingering over lunch feels natural.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSmall Details, Lasting Quality\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGalvanised steel frame:\u003c\/strong\u003e anti-corrosion treatment helps the set face changeable weather on balconies and terraces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV-resistant powder coating:\u003c\/strong\u003e protects the finish and keeps the grey colour vibrant and even.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCurved slats:\u003c\/strong\u003e seat and back slats follow the body, giving greater comfort for long breakfasts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProtective glides:\u003c\/strong\u003e help prevent damage to decking, patio tiles and indoor floors whenever the chairs are moved around.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFermob Bistro Set Dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFermob\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSet includes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 table, 2 chairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGalvanised steel, anti-corrosion treated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFinish\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUV-resistant powder coating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChair dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 82 x W 50 x D 42cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChair weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.8kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 74 x W 60 x D 60cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLoad capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e192kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMade in France, Thoissey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSmall Spaces, Big Personality\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe compact footprint suits narrow balconies, courtyard corners and even a sunny kitchen nook, indoors or out. Carry the light chairs into the morning sun for coffee, then tuck them back under cover in the evening when the dew starts to fall.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock and Ready\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis grey Fermob bistro set is in stock at Garden N Outdoor, sent by quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will the steel rust if left outdoors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The steel is galvanised and anti-corrosion treated, then finished with a UV-resistant powder coating to protect it. As with any outdoor furniture, wiping off standing water and storing it under cover in winter will help it look good for longer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can I use the Fermob bistro set indoors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Yes. Fermob describes it as suitable for any indoor or outdoor space. Protective glides on the feet help prevent damage to floors, so it works equally well in a kitchen, conservatory or breakfast corner.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How fast will my bistro set arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Your set is packed for swift UK dispatch and travels by a dependable courier service, with tracking so you know when to expect it. We aim for a prompt UK arrival, ready for the next sunny morning.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Fermob","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67903118737704,"sku":"Item #642241","price":98.97,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/fermob-grey-3-piece-steel-bistro-table-set-quick-uk-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145984"},{"product_id":"palram-aquila-door-canopy","title":"Palram Canopia Aquila Clear Door Canopy, UV Blocking Patio Cover in 2 Sizes","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Canopia Aquila Clear Door Canopy\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Canopia Aquila clear door canopy is a DIY awning for homeowners who want a dry, bright step outside the front door, back door or a window. A high impact, clear 4mm solid panel keeps the rain off while daylight still reaches the hallway, and it is naturally immune to 100% of harmful UV rays. Choose the 1500mm or 2050mm width to suit your doorway and wall space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eClear Cover Beats a Dark Timber Porch\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSolid wooden porches shade the entrance and need regular painting, while thin plastic canopies can sag and leak where they meet the wall. The Aquila uses laser cut, dark grey powder coated galvanised steel support arms to hold the panel firm. A front aluminium trim directs rainwater sideways rather than onto your head, and a hidden rubber gasket at the back seals the canopy to the wall surface to prevent water seepage. The design needs no routine maintenance, and more units can be joined with Palram's Canopy Connector Kit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDesign Points That Keep You Dry\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e4mm solid polycarbonate:\u003c\/strong\u003e high impact, clear panel for strong protection from harsh weather throughout the year.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel support arms:\u003c\/strong\u003e laser cut, galvanised and dark grey powder coated for a durable, tidy frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHidden wall gasket:\u003c\/strong\u003e seals the canopy to the wall so water does not seep down behind it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtendable:\u003c\/strong\u003e join extra units with the Palram Canopy Connector Kit to cover a wider frontage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eClear Door Canopy Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAquila Door\/Patio Cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable sizes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1500mm, 2050mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePanel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClear 4mm solid polycarbonate, blocks 100% of harmful UV rays\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupport arms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLaser cut galvanised steel, dark grey powder coated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTrim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFront aluminium trim directs rainwater sideways\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWall seal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHidden rubber gasket\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAquila 1500 dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 18 x W 151 x D 92cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAquila 1500 covering area\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 m²\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIY kit, installation hardware included, no special tools required\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor DIY-Minded Homeowners\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFit it above a front door in an afternoon with the supplied hardware, and every rainy return home becomes calmer, with no more fumbling for keys under a dripping sky. It suits brick, render and modern cladding alike, adding a neat, light-filled finish to any entrance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBoth Sizes Available\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Aquila 1500 and 2050 clear door canopies are in stock at Garden N Outdoor with fast-tracked UK transit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will the Aquila stand up to British weather?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Palram Canopia builds it for strong, durable protection from harsh weather throughout the year. The 4mm high impact polycarbonate panel sits on galvanised steel arms, and the front trim plus rear gasket manage rain so water runs off sideways.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Do I need special tools to fit it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: No special tools are required. The DIY assembly kit includes the installation hardware, and an assembly instruction leaflet comes with it. You will still need suitable wall fixings for your wall type and a second pair of hands to lift the panel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How long will delivery take?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Canopies are packed carefully and sent with fast-tracked UK transit through a dependable courier service. You will receive tracking once it leaves us, so you can plan for a prompt UK arrival.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram Canopia","offers":[{"title":"1500mm","offer_id":67903119327528,"sku":"Item #157411","price":178.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"2050mm","offer_id":67903119360296,"sku":"Item #157412","price":238.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-aquila-clear-door-and-patio-canopy-quick-uk-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145985"},{"product_id":"palram-palermo-gazebo-netting","title":"Palram Canopia Netting Set for Palermo Gazebos, Zip-Together Bug Screens, 4 Panels","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Canopia Netting Set for Palermo Gazebos\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis Palram Canopia gazebo netting set is a four-panel bug screen for owners of Palermo gazebos who want long summer evenings outdoors without midges and mosquitoes spoiling them. The black polyester mesh lets air flow through while keeping unwanted insects out, so the space stays breezy rather than stuffy. It is designed specifically for Palermo gazebos in 10x10ft, 11x11ft and 12x12ft sizes, and one pack covers the entire structure.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePurpose-Built Beats Universal Nets\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGeneric mosquito curtains rarely match the frame, so they droop, leave gaps at the corners and flap loose in the wind. This set is made to fit the Palermo range: hooks on the lightweight polyester screens slide straight into the clips along the gazebo's track line. Zips connect neighbouring panels, closing the gaps that let bugs sneak in, and ties pull the screens neatly back to the corner posts when you want an open view. The mesh is strong, see-through and UV resistant, so it is made to handle long, bright days.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy This Netting Set Works\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZip-together screens:\u003c\/strong\u003e panels connect to each other for total bug protection around the whole gazebo.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree-height tiebacks:\u003c\/strong\u003e top, middle and bottom corner post ties hold the curtains open tidily during the day.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSee-through polyester mesh:\u003c\/strong\u003e strong yet lightweight, keeping the garden view clear while insects stay outside.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTrack line hooks:\u003c\/strong\u003e hooks slide into the existing clips, so fitting and removing the panels is straightforward.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGazebo Netting Set Details\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProduct\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNetting set for Palermo gazebos\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolyester mesh, UV resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePanels per set\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 mesh nets\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFitting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHooks slide into clips at the gazebo track line\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClosure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eZips connect the screens together\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTiebacks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTop, middle and bottom corner post ties\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible with\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia Palermo 10x10ft, 11x11ft, 12x12ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlease note\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGazebo or patio cover not included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Long Evenings Under the Gazebo\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eEat, read or chat late into the evening without swatting at insects around the table. Tie the panels back on bright afternoons for an open, airy feel, then zip them closed as the light fades and the midges start to gather.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStock Status\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palermo gazebo netting set is in stock at Garden N Outdoor, with prompt UK arrival.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is the mesh tough enough for a whole season outside?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The screens are made from strong, lightweight polyester that is UV resistant. Using the tiebacks when the panels are open reduces strain on the fabric, and bringing the set indoors over winter is a sensible way to keep it in good condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will this netting fit my gazebo?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It is designed for Palram Canopia Palermo gazebos in 10x10ft, 11x11ft and 12x12ft sizes, hooking into the clips on the track line. It is not intended for other brands, and the gazebo itself is not included in the pack.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How long will delivery take?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Netting sets are packed for swift UK dispatch and sent with a dependable courier service, so you can follow the parcel with tracking. Expect a prompt UK arrival in good time for the next warm evening.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram Canopia","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67903119294760,"sku":"Item #639762","price":98.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-canopia-palermo-gazebo-netting-set-quick-uk-delivery-1.webp?v=1792145985"},{"product_id":"ram-4-tier-greenhouse","title":"Ram 4 Tier Mini Greenhouse with 4 Shelves, Weatherproof PVC Cover and Roll-Up Zip Door","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRam 4 Tier Mini Greenhouse\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Ram 4 tier mini greenhouse is a compact growing station for gardeners with a patio, balcony or small yard who want to start seeds and shelter young plants early. Four shelves sit inside a metal frame wrapped in a clear, weatherproof PVC cover, and a roll-up zip door makes watering and ventilation simple. It stands about 130cm tall on a 50 x 45cm footprint, so it fits against a sunny wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGrowing Space Without a Big Footprint\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA walk-in greenhouse eats up garden space and budget, while a bare windowsill rarely holds more than a few pots. This Ram unit stacks its growing room vertically across four shelves, so seed trays, herbs and bedding plants share one slim footprint. The clear PVC cover lets light through and traps warmth, sheltering seedlings from wind and rain. When the day warms up, roll up the zip door for airflow, then close it again in the evening. The metal frame pushes together without tools, making setup quick.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e4 Tier Mini Greenhouse Highlights\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFour shelves:\u003c\/strong\u003e plenty of room for seed trays, small pots and young seedlings stacked one above another.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClear PVC cover:\u003c\/strong\u003e lets daylight through while keeping wind and rain away from tender plants.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRoll-up zip door:\u003c\/strong\u003e open it for watering and ventilation, then zip it closed to hold warmth.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTool-less assembly:\u003c\/strong\u003e the metal frame slots together without tools, so you can be sowing the same day.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMini Greenhouse Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 tier mini greenhouse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 130 x L 50 x D 45cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMetal\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eClear weatherproof PVC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRoll-up zip door\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelves\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.82kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo tools needed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Patios, Balconies and Small Gardens\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart tomatoes, chillies and herbs a few weeks earlier in spring, or harden off bedding plants before they go into borders. On a balcony or courtyard, it turns a narrow sunny spot into a productive mini nursery for the whole growing season.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock and Ready to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Ram 4 tier mini greenhouse is in stock at Garden N Outdoor and quickly shipped across the UK.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will it stay upright in windy weather?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Like most lightweight mini greenhouses, it is best placed against a sheltered wall and secured with ground pegs or wall ties in exposed spots. Putting heavier pots on the lowest shelf also helps keep it steady on breezy days.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How do I put the frame together?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The metal frame pushes together without tools, then the clear PVC cover slips over the top and the four shelves sit inside. Zip the door closed to keep warmth in, or roll it up and tie it back for airflow.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: When will my mini greenhouse arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Orders are packed for swift UK dispatch and travel with a dependable courier service, with tracking provided. You can expect quick UK delivery, ready to start sowing as soon as it lands.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"RAM ONLINE","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67911437517096,"sku":"AA0001","price":15.49,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/ram-4-tier-mini-greenhouse-with-pvc-cover-and-zip-roll-up-door-uk-1.webp?v=1792426947"},{"product_id":"gigalumi-solar-flame-lights-6","title":"GIGALUMI Solar Garden Lights, Flickering Flame Effect, Waterproof, 6 Pack","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGIGALUMI Solar Flickering Flame Garden Lights, 6 Pack\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGIGALUMI solar flame garden lights bring the warm flicker of a torch to paths, borders and patios for anyone who wants evening ambience without wiring, fuel or running costs. This pack contains six lights, each with its own solar panel that charges by day. As dusk falls they switch on automatically, glowing with a flickering flame effect for up to 8 hours after a sunny day, then switch off at dawn.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAll the Glow, None of the Fuel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eReal garden torches need fuel, matches and a watchful eye, and mains lighting means digging cable runs across the lawn. These GIGALUMI lights avoid both. LEDs recreate the look of a dancing flame, while the built-in sensor handles switching on and off for you, so there is nothing to remember each evening. Each light mounts on a pole with a ground stake, pushing straight into soil or lawn edges. Built to be waterproof, they are made to sit outside through rain and changeable weather, ready for every evening outdoors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGarden Lights Worth Having\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlickering flame effect:\u003c\/strong\u003e a soft, warm, moving glow that gives paths and patios a cosy feel after dark.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDusk to dawn sensor:\u003c\/strong\u003e the lights switch on automatically at nightfall and off again at sunrise, every day.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to 8 hours:\u003c\/strong\u003e a full day of sunshine powers a long evening of soft flame-effect light.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWaterproof build:\u003c\/strong\u003e designed to stay outdoors in the rain, glowing from spring right through to autumn.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSolar Flame Garden Lights Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGIGALUMI\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePack quantity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 lights\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight source\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLED, flickering flame effect\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRun time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 8 hours after a sunny day\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwitching\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic on at dusk, off at dawn\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeather resistance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWaterproof\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMounting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePole with ground stake\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.18kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Paths, Borders and Patios\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLine the path to the front door, mark the edges of flower beds or circle the patio for summer evenings outside. Because each light runs on its own panel, you can rearrange them whenever the planting changes, with no cables to move.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock and Ready to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe GIGALUMI 6 pack is in stock at Garden N Outdoor, sent with fast-tracked UK transit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Do these solar lights need any wiring?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: No. Each light has its own solar panel and switches itself on and off, so there is nothing to connect. Push the ground stake into soil where the panel will see daylight, and the light is ready to work.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How long will they glow each night?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: After a sunny day the lights can run for up to 8 hours. Placing them where the panels catch direct sun gives the best results, and run time is naturally shorter after dull winter days.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How fast will my lights arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Your 6 pack is packed for swift UK dispatch and sent by a dependable courier service. Tracking follows, and you can expect a prompt UK arrival in time for the next evening outdoors.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"GIGALUMI","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67911437549864,"sku":"AA0002","price":26.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/gigalumi-solar-flickering-flame-garden-lights-6-pack-waterproof-1.webp?v=1792426973"},{"product_id":"torchtree-solar-disk-lights-24","title":"Torchtree Solar Ground Lights, 8 LED Disk Lights, Warm White, IP65, 24 Pack","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTorchtree Solar Ground Disk Lights, 24 Pack\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTorchtree solar ground lights are low-profile disk lights for homeowners who want paths, lawns and driveways softly outlined after dark with no cables at all. This pack holds 24 lights, each fitted with 8 warm white LEDs giving up to 40 lumens. A built-in sensor switches them on at dusk and off at dawn, and a full charge of 6 to 8 hours in daylight powers them for around 8 to 10 hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLots of Light, Zero Trenches\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWired garden lighting means digging channels, running cable and often calling an electrician. Spike lights on tall stakes can also be knocked over by mowers and feet. These Torchtree disks sit low to the ground, push in by hand and charge themselves from the sun through a 600mAh battery. Rated IP65 waterproof, they are built to cope with harsh weather, from heavy rain to frosty mornings. With 24 lights in one box, you can line a long driveway or edge a winding path in one go instead of buying several small packs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat 24 Disk Lights Deliver\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e8 LEDs per light:\u003c\/strong\u003e up to 40 lumens each, bright enough to mark edges clearly without glare.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIP65 waterproof rating:\u003c\/strong\u003e designed to handle rain and harsh weather while sitting at ground level.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAutomatic light sensor:\u003c\/strong\u003e each disk turns on at dusk and off at dawn with no switches to flick.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e24 lights in the pack:\u003c\/strong\u003e enough to outline a long path, driveway or lawn edge in one installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSolar Ground Lights Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTorchtree\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePack quantity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24 lights\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLEDs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 per light\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrightness\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 40 lumens\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight colour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarm white\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBattery\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600mAh rechargeable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCharging time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6-8 hours of daylight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRun time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8-10 hours on a full charge\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWaterproof rating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIP65\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSolar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Lawns, Driveways and Walkways\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGuide guests from the gate to the front door, outline the driveway for easier parking or trace the edge of the lawn for a tidy night-time look. Because they sit flush with the ground, the mower and garden games pass right over the line of lights.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock Today\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Torchtree 24 pack is in stock at Garden N Outdoor and goes out by dependable courier service.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How long do Torchtree ground lights stay on?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: After 6 to 8 hours of charging in daylight, each light runs for around 8 to 10 hours. Shorter, cloudier winter days naturally reduce charge, so keep the solar panels clear of leaves, soil and grass clippings.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How are the disk lights installed?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Each light pushes into the ground by hand, with no wiring or tools required. Choose a spot that gets direct sun, press the disk in until it sits level, and the built-in sensor takes care of switching on and off.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How quickly will my lights arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Lighting orders are packed for swift UK dispatch and handed to a dependable courier service, with tracking provided. Expect quick UK delivery, so your path can be lit within days of ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Torchtree","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67911437582632,"sku":"AA0003","price":44.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/torchtree-solar-ground-disk-lights-8-led-warm-white-24-pack-uk-1.webp?v=1792426997"},{"product_id":"4lite-outdoor-up-down-wall-lights","title":"4lite Outdoor Up Down Light Fixture, 2 Pack","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e4lite Outdoor Up Down Light Fixture, 2 Pack\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 4lite Outdoor Up Down Light Fixture 2 Pack gives you two bi-directional wall lights that cast light both upwards and downwards for striking accent lighting on house walls. They are made from die-cast aluminium for durability and finished in textured dark grey paint for a modern architectural look.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStyle and Safety by Every Door\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFitted either side of a front door, garage or patio doors, these lights add a welcoming glow and make entrances safer for people coming and going after dark. They also add an extra layer of security to your home.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach light takes up to 2 x 50W GU10 bulbs (not included) and runs on 220-240V. The IP54 outdoor rating protects against dust and splashing water, and the lights operate from -10° to 40°C. Each measures H 20.8 x W 10 x D 8 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 Pack:\u003c\/strong\u003e Matching pair.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp and Down Light:\u003c\/strong\u003e Bi-directional beam.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDie-Cast Aluminium:\u003c\/strong\u003e Durable build.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIP54 Rated:\u003c\/strong\u003e For outdoor use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e4lite Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4lite WiZ\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOutdoor Light\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 20.8 x W 10 x D 8 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Front Doors, Garages and Patios\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for accent lighting on house walls, porches and garden buildings.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBulbs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGU10 lamp type, up to 2 x 50W per light. Bulbs are not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlanning Your Outdoor Lighting\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWall lights by doors, paths and steps make arriving home after dark safer and easier. Up and down lights wash the wall with light for a modern architectural look, and work well in pairs either side of a door or garage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInstallation and Safety\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOutdoor mains lighting should be installed by a qualified electrician in line with UK wiring regulations. Switch off the power at the consumer unit before fitting or changing bulbs, and use bulbs of the correct type and wattage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCare and Maintenance\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWipe fittings with a soft damp cloth to remove dust, cobwebs and grime, and check seals each spring. Avoid pressure washing outdoor lights directly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eChoosing Bulbs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWarm white bulbs of around 2700K to 3000K create a welcoming glow on house walls, while cooler white bulbs give a crisper, more modern look. LED GU10 bulbs use far less energy than halogen equivalents and last much longer, which makes them a practical choice for lights that are on every evening.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 4lite Outdoor Up Down Light Fixture, 2 Pack is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Are bulbs included?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: No. Each light takes up to 2 x 50W GU10 bulbs, sold separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 20.8 x W 10 x D 8 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"4lite WiZ","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015614951720,"sku":"Item #344736","price":28.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/4lite-outdoor-up-down-wall-light-ip54-2-pack-1.webp?v=1793110902"},{"product_id":"kettler-avora-4-piece-lounge-set","title":"Kettler Avora 4 Piece Deep Seating Set","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKettler Avora 4 Piece Deep Seating Set\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Kettler Avora 4 Piece Deep Seating Set creates a relaxed outdoor lounge with two armchairs, a two-seat sofa and a matching coffee table. Powder-coated aluminium frames with a wood-effect finish are paired with handwoven, UV-resistant synthetic wicker detailing and deep, supportive Kettler RainSafe weatherproof cushions in cream.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLow-Maintenance Comfort\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe furniture can remain outdoors year-round, excluding the cushions, and the easy-clean materials need only occasional washing with mild soapy water. The Eco Wood tabletop gives the appearance of natural timber without the upkeep. The set is suitable for both indoor and outdoor use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eArmchairs measure H 84.5 x W 78.7 x D 82cm (9.9kg each), the sofa H 84.5 x W 148.5 x D 82cm (18.6kg) and the coffee table H 34.5 x W 115 x D 69.5cm (11.2kg). Average assembly time is 45 minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSeats 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e 2 armchairs and a sofa.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAluminium Frame:\u003c\/strong\u003e Wood-effect finish.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRainSafe Cushions:\u003c\/strong\u003e Weatherproof.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEco Wood Table Top:\u003c\/strong\u003e Timber look.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAvora Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCream\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKettler\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium, Wicker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeep Seating Set\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of Seats\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45 minutes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChair Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 84.5 x W 78.7 x D 82cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSofa Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 84.5 x W 148.5 x D 82cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 34.5 x W 115 x D 69.5cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight of Chair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e9.9kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight of Table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e11.2kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSofa Weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18.6kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCollection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvora\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Patios, Decking and Conservatories\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for relaxing, entertaining friends and evenings outdoors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSet Includes\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e2 x armchairs, 1 x two-seat sofa and 1 x coffee table (W 115 x D 69.5cm).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eArranging Your Garden Furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMeasure your patio or decking before ordering and allow at least 60 to 90cm around furniture so people can move comfortably. Place sets on firm, level ground such as paving or decking to keep them stable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCaring for Your Set\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWipe frames down with mild soapy water and rinse with clean water a few times each season. Brush off leaves and debris regularly and avoid harsh chemicals or abrasive pads that can damage finishes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eProtecting Cushions\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring cushions indoors or store them in a dry storage box when not in use, especially overnight and over winter. A fitted furniture cover helps keep the whole set clean and dry between uses.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Kettler Avora 4 Piece Deep Seating Set is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is included?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Two armchairs, a two-seat sofa and a coffee table.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Armchairs H 84.5 x W 78.7 x D 82cm; sofa H 84.5 x W 148.5 x D 82cm; coffee table H 34.5 x W 115 x D 69.5cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Kettler","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015615148328,"sku":"Item #674852","price":798.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/kettler-avora-4-piece-garden-lounge-set-seats-4-1.webp?v=1793110914"},{"product_id":"kettler-avora-5-piece-dining-set","title":"Kettler Avora 5 Piece Dining Set","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKettler Avora 5 Piece Dining Set\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Kettler Avora 5 Piece Dining Set brings together four ergonomic round-back dining chairs with Kettler RainSafe weather-repellent seat cushions and a 115cm round dining table. Powder-coated aluminium frames with a wood-effect finish and handwoven UV-resistant synthetic wicker give it a warm, natural look.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEveryday Outdoor Dining Made Easy\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe wood-effect slatted Eco Wood tabletop offers the appearance of timber with enhanced weather resistance, and simply wipes clean with a damp cloth. The set is suitable for year-round outdoor use, excluding the cushions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe table measures H 75 x W 115 x D 115cm and weighs 16.3kg; each chair measures H 84 x W 62 x D 64cm and weighs 3.7kg. Average assembly time is 30 to 60 minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSeats 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e Round-back chairs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e115cm Round Table:\u003c\/strong\u003e Eco Wood top.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAluminium Frames:\u003c\/strong\u003e Wood-effect finish.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRainSafe Cushions:\u003c\/strong\u003e Weather-repellent.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAvora Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCream\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKettler\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium, Wicker\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePatio Dining Set\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of Seats\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable Shape\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRound\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 - 60 minutes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 75 x W 115 x D 115cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChair Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 84 x W 62 x D 64cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight of Chair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.7kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight of Table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16.3kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCollection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvora\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Garden Dining and Entertaining\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for family meals, lunches with friends and barbecues on the patio.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSet Includes\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e4 x dining chairs and 1 x round dining table (W 115 x D 115cm).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eArranging Your Garden Furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMeasure your patio or decking before ordering and allow at least 60 to 90cm around furniture so people can move comfortably. Place sets on firm, level ground such as paving or decking to keep them stable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCaring for Your Set\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWipe frames down with mild soapy water and rinse with clean water a few times each season. Brush off leaves and debris regularly and avoid harsh chemicals or abrasive pads that can damage finishes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eProtecting Cushions\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring cushions indoors or store them in a dry storage box when not in use, especially overnight and over winter. A fitted furniture cover helps keep the whole set clean and dry between uses.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Kettler Avora 5 Piece Dining Set is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How many people does it seat?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It seats four, with four dining chairs and a 115cm round table.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Table H 75 x W 115 x D 115cm; chairs H 84 x W 62 x D 64cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Kettler","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015615705384,"sku":"Item #674849","price":898.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/kettler-avora-5-piece-round-garden-dining-set-1.webp?v=1793110927"},{"product_id":"norfolk-leisure-aston-patio-set","title":"Norfolk Leisure Aston 4 Piece Patio Set","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNorfolk Leisure Aston 4 Piece Patio Set\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Norfolk Leisure Aston 4 Piece Patio Set includes a two-seater sofa, two armchairs and a low coffee table to create a relaxed seating area for four. A powder-coated, galvanised steel frame is treated to protect against the weather, and the table has a ceramic printed glass top.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNeutral Style for Any Garden\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBeige oval wicker rope detailing and comfortable Olefin cushions give the set a soft, sophisticated look that suits patios, decking and garden rooms. Assembly takes around 10 minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClean the frame with water and mild soap, and clean cushions with a mild detergent and damp cloth. Store cushions indoors over winter, and use a protective cover to help extend the life of the frame. The chairs measure H 72 x W 64 x D 64cm, the sofa H 72 x W 132 x D 64cm and the table H 34 x W 110 x D 55cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSeats 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e Sofa and 2 armchairs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGalvanised Steel Frame:\u003c\/strong\u003e Weather treated.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGlass Top Table:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ceramic printed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOlefin Cushions:\u003c\/strong\u003e Easy care.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNorfolk Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNorfolk Leisure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeep Seating Patio Set\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of Seats\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 minutes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChair Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 72 x W 64 x D 64cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSofa Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 72 x W 132 x D 64cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 34 x W 110 x D 55cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Patios and Decking\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for relaxing outdoors and entertaining friends.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSet Includes\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e1 x two-seater sofa, 2 x armchairs and 1 x coffee table.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eArranging Your Garden Furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMeasure your patio or decking before ordering and allow at least 60 to 90cm around furniture so people can move comfortably. Place sets on firm, level ground such as paving or decking to keep them stable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCaring for Your Set\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWipe frames down with mild soapy water and rinse with clean water a few times each season. Brush off leaves and debris regularly and avoid harsh chemicals or abrasive pads that can damage finishes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eProtecting Cushions\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring cushions indoors or store them in a dry storage box when not in use, especially overnight and over winter. A fitted furniture cover helps keep the whole set clean and dry between uses.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Norfolk Leisure Aston 4 Piece Patio Set is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How long does assembly take?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Around 10 minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Chairs H 72 x W 64 x D 64cm; sofa H 72 x W 132 x D 64cm; table H 34 x W 110 x D 55cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Norfolk Leisure","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015615836456,"sku":"Item #675981","price":578.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/norfolk-leisure-aston-4-piece-garden-lounge-set-1.webp?v=1793110938"},{"product_id":"norfolk-leisure-stratton-patio-set","title":"Norfolk Leisure Stratton 4 Piece Patio Set","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNorfolk Leisure Stratton 4 Piece Patio Set\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Norfolk Leisure Stratton 4 Piece Patio Set combines a two-seater sofa, two armchairs and a coffee table in a clean, modern design. The powder-coated aluminium frame is paired with a teak-look polywood tabletop and armrests, made from moulded resin that resists the weather without the maintenance of real wood.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCushions Made for British Weather\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOlefin fabric cushions are mould, mildew and water resistant, with excellent colour fastness so they stay looking fresh even in direct sunlight. For best care, cover the set when it is not in use for extended periods.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe sofa measures H 75.5 x W 138 x D 87.5cm and weighs 18kg, each armchair measures H 75.5 x W 74 x D 87.5cm and weighs 9kg, and the table measures H 40 x W 107 x D 57.3cm and weighs 9.3kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSeats 4:\u003c\/strong\u003e Sofa and 2 armchairs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAluminium Frame:\u003c\/strong\u003e Powder coated.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTeak-Look Polywood:\u003c\/strong\u003e Low maintenance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOlefin Cushions:\u003c\/strong\u003e Mould and water resistant.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNorfolk Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNorfolk Leisure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDeep Seating Patio Set\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of Seats\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSofa Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 75.5 x W 138 x D 87.5cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 40 x W 107 x D 57.3cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight of Table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e9.3kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArmchair Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 75.5 x W 74 x D 87.5cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSofa Weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArmchair Weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e9kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Patios, Decking and Garden Rooms\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for lounging, morning coffee and evenings with friends.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSet Includes\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e1 x two-seater sofa, 2 x armchairs and 1 x coffee table.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eArranging Your Garden Furniture\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMeasure your patio or decking before ordering and allow at least 60 to 90cm around furniture so people can move comfortably. Place sets on firm, level ground such as paving or decking to keep them stable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCaring for Your Set\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWipe frames down with mild soapy water and rinse with clean water a few times each season. Brush off leaves and debris regularly and avoid harsh chemicals or abrasive pads that can damage finishes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eProtecting Cushions\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring cushions indoors or store them in a dry storage box when not in use, especially overnight and over winter. A fitted furniture cover helps keep the whole set clean and dry between uses.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Norfolk Leisure Stratton 4 Piece Patio Set is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Are the cushions water resistant?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Yes, the Olefin cushion fabric is mould, mildew and water resistant.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Sofa H 75.5 x W 138 x D 87.5cm; armchairs H 75.5 x W 74 x D 87.5cm; table H 40 x W 107 x D 57.3cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Norfolk Leisure","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015616131368,"sku":"Item #675976","price":798.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/norfolk-leisure-stratton-4-piece-patio-lounge-set-1.webp?v=1793110954"},{"product_id":"veito-space-s2500-infrared-heater","title":"Veito Space S2500 Carbon Infrared Heater - White","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVeito Space S2500 Carbon Infrared Heater - White\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Veito Space S2500 is a carbon infrared heater in white, built for both indoor and outdoor spaces. It produces instant warmth with no warm-up time, using carbon filament technology to create a soft, radiant heat that warms people and surfaces directly and covers an area of up to 30 m².\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWarmth Where You Need It\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMedium-wave infrared heat travels effectively across open spaces, making it suited to patios, gardens, gazebos, workshops and conservatories. It runs silently with no odours, and an integrated digital thermostat and remote control let you adjust it from your seat.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe stainless-steel body is IP44 rated for all-weather use and can be wall or ceiling mounted. A tip-over protection system adds safety. It measures H 17 x W 85 x D 7 cm and weighs 3.5kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInstant Heat:\u003c\/strong\u003e Carbon infrared.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to 30 m²:\u003c\/strong\u003e Heating area.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIP44 Rated:\u003c\/strong\u003e Indoor and outdoor.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRemote Control:\u003c\/strong\u003e With thermostat.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVeito Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTip Over\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTip Over Protection System\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeating Area\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 m²\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhite\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVeito\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless Steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePatio Heater\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 17 x W 85 x D 7 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.5kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Patios, Gazebos and Workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for extending evenings outdoors and warming garden rooms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMounting\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWall or ceiling mounting options.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePositioning Your Heater\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInfrared heaters warm people and objects directly rather than the air, so aim the heater towards the seating area. Mount it at the height recommended in the manual and keep it well clear of ceilings, curtains, parasols and other flammable materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eElectrical Safety\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse an outdoor-rated, weatherproof socket protected by an RCD, or have the heater wired in by a qualified electrician. Switch off and unplug the heater when not in use and let it cool before cleaning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGetting the Most From It\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInfrared heat feels warm almost instantly, making it ideal for chilly evenings on the patio, in a gazebo or in a workshop. Combine it with screens or windbreaks to keep the warmth where you are sitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy Choose Infrared\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnlike fan heaters, infrared heaters do not rely on warming the surrounding air, so the heat is not easily blown away by a breeze. That makes them well suited to open patios, covered seating areas and draughty workshops where conventional heaters struggle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Veito Space S2500 Carbon Infrared Heater - White is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can it be used indoors?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Yes, it is suitable for both indoor and outdoor use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 17 x W 85 x D 7 cm and weighs 3.5kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Veito","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015616491816,"sku":"Item #593226","price":278.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/veito-space-s2500-infrared-heater-indoor-outdoor-1.webp?v=1793110966"},{"product_id":"keter-grill-gazebo","title":"Keter Grill Gazebo 8ft 1\" x 6ft 7\" (2.47 x 2m)","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeter Grill Gazebo 8ft 1\" x 6ft 7\" (2.47 x 2m)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Keter Grill Gazebo (2.47 x 2m) gives your barbecue area a dedicated, covered space for grilling and entertaining. It has a low-maintenance resin structure with an attractive wood-like finish and wood-look bar shelves, reinforced with metal rods for strength and stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGrill Through the British Weather\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe gazebo is built to withstand tough weather, with a snow load capacity of 100kg per square metre and wind resistance up to 90 km\/h. It won't peel, rot or need painting, and it is made from recycled materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGrounded metal feet and built-in footrails add stability, internal hooks let you hang tools and lights, and the bar shelves give space for plates, sauces and drinks. It measures H 238 x W 247 x D 200 cm and weighs 96.8kg. Assembly takes 5 to 6 hours with two people.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e2.47 x 2m Footprint:\u003c\/strong\u003e Covers a barbecue area.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSnow Load 100kg\/m²:\u003c\/strong\u003e Strong roof.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind Resistant:\u003c\/strong\u003e Up to 90 km\/h.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBar Shelves and Hooks:\u003c\/strong\u003e For grilling kit.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeter Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5-6 hours (2 persons)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKeter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic, Steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGazebo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 238 x W 247 x D 200 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e96.8kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Barbecue Lovers\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for sheltering your grill and creating an outdoor bar and cooking zone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMaterials\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eResin structure with wood-like finish, reinforced with metal rods; metal feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreparing the Ground\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstall outdoor structures on firm, level ground such as paving slabs or a concrete base, and check local requirements before building near boundaries. Anchoring the structure securely helps it stand up to strong winds.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly Tips\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnpack and check all parts before starting, and allow plenty of time with at least two adults. Choose a dry, calm day for assembly and keep the instructions to hand throughout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSeasonal Care\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClear leaves and debris from roofs and gutters regularly and wash panels with mild soapy water and a soft brush. Check fixings each spring and autumn and tighten them if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGetting the Most From Your Outdoor Space\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA covered area lets you use the garden on drizzly days and long summer evenings alike. Add outdoor lighting, a patio heater or comfortable seating to turn it into a true outdoor room, and position it to make the most of views and evening sun.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Keter Grill Gazebo 8ft 1\" x 6ft 7\" (2.47 x 2m) is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How long does assembly take?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Around 5 to 6 hours with two people.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 238 x W 247 x D 200 cm and weighs 96.8kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Keter","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015616852264,"sku":"Item #569930","price":748.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/keter-grill-gazebo-8ft-x-6ft-7in-with-bar-shelves-1.webp?v=1793110979"},{"product_id":"palram-pro-door-awning-bundle","title":"Palram 160 x 96cm Pro Door Awning Bundle","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram 160 x 96cm Pro Door Awning Bundle\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Pro Door Awning Bundle (160 x 96cm) shelters your front or back door from rain, wind and snow, helping keep your entrance dry and comfortable. High impact, crystal-clear acrylic panels maintain 90% light transmission so your doorway stays bright, while resisting harmful UV rays.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA Neat, Modern Entrance\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eConcealed wall fastening gives a clean look with no visible fixings, and a built-in hidden gutter channels rainwater away from the doorstep. Powder-coated and galvanised steel support arms add strength and protect against rust.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe panels are easy to clean with mild soapy water and a soft cloth. The awning measures H 237 x W 160 x D 96cm and is finished in grey.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e160 x 96cm:\u003c\/strong\u003e Door coverage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClear Acrylic Panels:\u003c\/strong\u003e 90% light transmission.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV Resistant:\u003c\/strong\u003e Protects the entrance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHidden Gutter:\u003c\/strong\u003e Channels rainwater.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel, Acrylic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor Awning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 237 x W 160 x D 96cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Front and Back Doors\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for sheltering entrances, porches and patio doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMaterials\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClear acrylic panels with powder-coated and galvanised steel support arms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreparing the Ground\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstall outdoor structures on firm, level ground such as paving slabs or a concrete base, and check local requirements before building near boundaries. Anchoring the structure securely helps it stand up to strong winds.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly Tips\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnpack and check all parts before starting, and allow plenty of time with at least two adults. Choose a dry, calm day for assembly and keep the instructions to hand throughout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSeasonal Care\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClear leaves and debris from roofs and gutters regularly and wash panels with mild soapy water and a soft brush. Check fixings each spring and autumn and tighten them if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGetting the Most From Your Outdoor Space\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA covered area lets you use the garden on drizzly days and long summer evenings alike. Add outdoor lighting, a patio heater or comfortable seating to turn it into a true outdoor room, and position it to make the most of views and evening sun.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFitting a Door Canopy\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDoor canopies fix to the wall above the door frame, so check the wall is solid masonry and use fixings suited to your wall type. Measure the width of your door and frame before ordering and allow a little extra on each side for the best shelter from driving rain.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram 160 x 96cm Pro Door Awning Bundle is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Does it have a gutter?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Yes, it has a built-in hidden gutter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 237 x W 160 x D 96cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015617442088,"sku":"Item #650717","price":748.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-pro-door-awning-bundle-160-x-96cm-1.webp?v=1793110991"},{"product_id":"palram-sophia-pro-door-awning-bundle","title":"Palram Sophia Pro 215 x 96cm Door Awning Bundle","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Sophia Pro 215 x 96cm Door Awning Bundle\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Sophia Pro Door Awning Bundle (215 x 96cm) shelters your front or back door from rain, wind and snow, helping keep your entrance dry and comfortable. High impact, crystal-clear acrylic panels maintain 90% light transmission so your doorway stays bright, while resisting harmful UV rays.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA Neat, Modern Entrance\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eConcealed wall fastening gives a clean look with no visible fixings, and a built-in hidden gutter channels rainwater away from the doorstep. Powder-coated and galvanised steel support arms add strength and protect against rust.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe panels are easy to clean with mild soapy water and a soft cloth. The awning measures H 237 x W 215 x D 96cm and is finished in grey.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e215 x 96cm:\u003c\/strong\u003e Door coverage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClear Acrylic Panels:\u003c\/strong\u003e 90% light transmission.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV Resistant:\u003c\/strong\u003e Protects the entrance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHidden Gutter:\u003c\/strong\u003e Channels rainwater.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel, Acrylic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDoor Awning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 237 x W 215 x D 96cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Front and Back Doors\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for sheltering entrances, porches and patio doors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMaterials\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClear acrylic panels with powder-coated and galvanised steel support arms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreparing the Ground\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstall outdoor structures on firm, level ground such as paving slabs or a concrete base, and check local requirements before building near boundaries. Anchoring the structure securely helps it stand up to strong winds.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly Tips\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnpack and check all parts before starting, and allow plenty of time with at least two adults. Choose a dry, calm day for assembly and keep the instructions to hand throughout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSeasonal Care\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClear leaves and debris from roofs and gutters regularly and wash panels with mild soapy water and a soft brush. Check fixings each spring and autumn and tighten them if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGetting the Most From Your Outdoor Space\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA covered area lets you use the garden on drizzly days and long summer evenings alike. Add outdoor lighting, a patio heater or comfortable seating to turn it into a true outdoor room, and position it to make the most of views and evening sun.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFitting a Door Canopy\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDoor canopies fix to the wall above the door frame, so check the wall is solid masonry and use fixings suited to your wall type. Measure the width of your door and frame before ordering and allow a little extra on each side for the best shelter from driving rain.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Sophia Pro 215 x 96cm Door Awning Bundle is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Does it have a gutter?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Yes, it has a built-in hidden gutter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 237 x W 215 x D 96cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015617835304,"sku":"Item #650720","price":848.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-sophia-pro-door-awning-bundle-215-x-96cm-1.webp?v=1793111003"},{"product_id":"palram-canopia-feria-3-sidewall","title":"Palram Canopia Feria 3 SideWall Patio Cover, Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Canopia Feria 3 SideWall Patio Cover, Grey\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Canopia Feria 3 SideWall in grey attaches to the side of a Palram Canopia Feria patio cover, adding shelter from wind gusts and extra privacy so you can enjoy your patio on breezy evenings and cooler days. Please note it is designed for use with Feria patio covers, which are sold separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eShelter Without Losing Daylight\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHigh impact crystal acrylic panels let natural light through, so your outdoor space stays bright while being protected from the wind. The panels have double-sided UV protection, helping guard against sunburn and sun-bleaching of patio furniture.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstallation alongside your patio cover is simple. The SideWall measures H 289 x W 265 x D 3 cm and weighs 44 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFits Feria Patio Covers:\u003c\/strong\u003e Sold separately.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCrystal Acrylic Panels:\u003c\/strong\u003e Lets light through.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWind Protection:\u003c\/strong\u003e Adds privacy.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDouble-Sided UV Protection:\u003c\/strong\u003e Protects furniture.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFeria 3 Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCollection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeria 3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAcrylic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSideWall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 289 x W 265 x D 3 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e44 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Covered Patios\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for sheltering the open side of a Feria patio cover from wind.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eDesigned only for use with Palram Canopia Feria patio covers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreparing the Ground\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstall outdoor structures on firm, level ground such as paving slabs or a concrete base, and check local requirements before building near boundaries. Anchoring the structure securely helps it stand up to strong winds.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly Tips\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnpack and check all parts before starting, and allow plenty of time with at least two adults. Choose a dry, calm day for assembly and keep the instructions to hand throughout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSeasonal Care\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClear leaves and debris from roofs and gutters regularly and wash panels with mild soapy water and a soft brush. Check fixings each spring and autumn and tighten them if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGetting the Most From Your Outdoor Space\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA covered area lets you use the garden on drizzly days and long summer evenings alike. Add outdoor lighting, a patio heater or comfortable seating to turn it into a true outdoor room, and position it to make the most of views and evening sun.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Canopia Feria 3 SideWall Patio Cover, Grey is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Does it work with other patio covers?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It is designed for the Palram Canopia Feria range of patio covers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 289 x W 265 x D 3 cm and weighs 44 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram Canopia","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015618392360,"sku":"Item #306220","price":798.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-canopia-feria-3-patio-cover-side-wall-grey-1.webp?v=1793111016"},{"product_id":"palram-feria-3-patio-cover-grey","title":"Palram Canopia Feria 3 Veranda Patio Cover, Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Canopia Feria 3 Veranda Patio Cover, Grey\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Canopia Feria 3 Veranda Patio Cover in grey gives you a stylish covered outdoor space so you can enjoy the patio all year round. It has a rigid, powder-coated aluminium structure glazed with a virtually unbreakable multiwall polycarbonate roof. Choose from 3 x 3.05m or 3 x 4.25m.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLow Maintenance, Long Lasting\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe aluminium frame does not rust or rot, and the polycarbonate roof protects from rain and harmful UV rays while letting in daylight. Clean lines and detailed finishes complement most homes, whether you use it over a seating area, dining set or sun loungers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Click-N-Lock system makes assembly safe and simple, with no climbing needed for installation and no specialised tools required. Accessories such as side walls are not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAluminium Frame:\u003c\/strong\u003e Powder coated grey.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePolycarbonate Roof:\u003c\/strong\u003e Virtually unbreakable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTwo Sizes:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3 x 3.05m or 3 x 4.25m.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClick-N-Lock Assembly:\u003c\/strong\u003e No climbing needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePatio Cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable size options\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 x 3.05m, 3 x 4.25m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Patios and Outdoor Living\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for covering seating, dining and barbecue areas against the house.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSizes\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e3 x 3.05m or 3 x 4.25m. Accessories not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreparing the Ground\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstall outdoor structures on firm, level ground such as paving slabs or a concrete base, and check local requirements before building near boundaries. Anchoring the structure securely helps it stand up to strong winds.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly Tips\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnpack and check all parts before starting, and allow plenty of time with at least two adults. Choose a dry, calm day for assembly and keep the instructions to hand throughout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSeasonal Care\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClear leaves and debris from roofs and gutters regularly and wash panels with mild soapy water and a soft brush. Check fixings each spring and autumn and tighten them if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGetting the Most From Your Outdoor Space\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA covered area lets you use the garden on drizzly days and long summer evenings alike. Add outdoor lighting, a patio heater or comfortable seating to turn it into a true outdoor room, and position it to make the most of views and evening sun.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Canopia Feria 3 Veranda Patio Cover, Grey is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: 3 x 3.05m and 3 x 4.25m.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will it fit my patio?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Please measure your space and check the chosen size, 3 x 3.05m or 3 x 4.25m, before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram Canopia","offers":[{"title":"3 x 3.05m","offer_id":68015619047720,"sku":"Item #256967","price":798.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 x 4.25m","offer_id":68015619080488,"sku":"Item #256968","price":998.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-canopia-feria-3-veranda-patio-cover-grey-1.webp?v=1793111026"},{"product_id":"palram-feria-3-patio-cover-white","title":"Palram Canopia Feria 3 Veranda Patio Cover, White","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Canopia Feria 3 Veranda Patio Cover, White\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Canopia Feria 3 Veranda Patio Cover in white gives you a stylish covered outdoor space so you can enjoy the patio all year round. It has a rigid, powder-coated aluminium structure glazed with a virtually unbreakable multiwall polycarbonate roof. Choose from 3 x 3.05m or 3 x 4.25m.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLow Maintenance, Long Lasting\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe aluminium frame does not rust or rot, and the polycarbonate roof protects from rain and harmful UV rays while letting in daylight. Clean lines and detailed finishes complement most homes, whether you use it over a seating area, dining set or sun loungers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Click-N-Lock system makes assembly safe and simple, with no climbing needed for installation and no specialised tools required. Accessories such as side walls are not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAluminium Frame:\u003c\/strong\u003e Powder coated white.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePolycarbonate Roof:\u003c\/strong\u003e Virtually unbreakable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTwo Sizes:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3 x 3.05m or 3 x 4.25m.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClick-N-Lock Assembly:\u003c\/strong\u003e No climbing needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePatio Cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable size options\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 x 3.05m, 3 x 4.25m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Patios and Outdoor Living\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for covering seating, dining and barbecue areas against the house.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSizes\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e3 x 3.05m or 3 x 4.25m. Accessories not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreparing the Ground\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstall outdoor structures on firm, level ground such as paving slabs or a concrete base, and check local requirements before building near boundaries. Anchoring the structure securely helps it stand up to strong winds.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly Tips\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnpack and check all parts before starting, and allow plenty of time with at least two adults. Choose a dry, calm day for assembly and keep the instructions to hand throughout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSeasonal Care\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClear leaves and debris from roofs and gutters regularly and wash panels with mild soapy water and a soft brush. Check fixings each spring and autumn and tighten them if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGetting the Most From Your Outdoor Space\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA covered area lets you use the garden on drizzly days and long summer evenings alike. Add outdoor lighting, a patio heater or comfortable seating to turn it into a true outdoor room, and position it to make the most of views and evening sun.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Canopia Feria 3 Veranda Patio Cover, White is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: 3 x 3.05m and 3 x 4.25m.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Will it fit my patio?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Please measure your space and check the chosen size, 3 x 3.05m or 3 x 4.25m, before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram Canopia","offers":[{"title":"3 x 3.05m","offer_id":68015619997992,"sku":"Item #157416","price":798.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"3 x 4.25m","offer_id":68015620030760,"sku":"Item #157418","price":998.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-canopia-feria-3-veranda-patio-cover-white-1.webp?v=1793111041"},{"product_id":"palram-palermo-gazebo-3-6m","title":"Palram Canopia Palermo 11ft 9\" x 11ft 9\" (3.6 x 3.6m) Aluminium and Polycarbonate Gazebo","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Canopia Palermo 11ft 9\" x 11ft 9\" (3.6 x 3.6m) Aluminium and Polycarbonate Gazebo\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Canopia Palermo 3.6 x 3.6m (11ft 9in square) Aluminium and Polycarbonate Gazebo creates a comfortable, shaded retreat in your garden. It is a hardtop open gazebo with a sturdy aluminium frame and matte grey roof panels that are UV protected on both sides, ideal for outdoor dining, entertaining or covering a hot tub.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCooler Shade on Sunny Days\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHeat Block Technology in the full-shade twin-wall roof stops the sun's rays shining through, keeping the space beneath cooler and more comfortable. The rust-resistant structure is built for year-round weather resistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAdd gazebo netting to keep insects out or curtains for privacy, both sold separately. Flooring is not included. It measures H 295 x W 360 x D 360 cm and weighs 82 kg. Assembly takes around 8 hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e3.6 x 3.6m:\u003c\/strong\u003e Aluminium frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePolycarbonate Roof:\u003c\/strong\u003e Twin-wall, full shade.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeat Block Technology:\u003c\/strong\u003e Cooler shade.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV Protected:\u003c\/strong\u003e Both sides.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalermo Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDark Grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGazebo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 295 x W 360 x D 360 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e82 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncludes Flooring\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCollection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalermo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Garden Dining and Hot Tubs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for shading a dining set, lounge area or hot tub.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMaterials\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAluminium frame with matte grey polycarbonate roof panels. Flooring not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreparing the Ground\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstall outdoor structures on firm, level ground such as paving slabs or a concrete base, and check local requirements before building near boundaries. Anchoring the structure securely helps it stand up to strong winds.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly Tips\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnpack and check all parts before starting, and allow plenty of time with at least two adults. Choose a dry, calm day for assembly and keep the instructions to hand throughout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSeasonal Care\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClear leaves and debris from roofs and gutters regularly and wash panels with mild soapy water and a soft brush. Check fixings each spring and autumn and tighten them if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGetting the Most From Your Outdoor Space\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA covered area lets you use the garden on drizzly days and long summer evenings alike. Add outdoor lighting, a patio heater or comfortable seating to turn it into a true outdoor room, and position it to make the most of views and evening sun.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Canopia Palermo 11ft 9\" x 11ft 9\" (3.6 x 3.6m) Aluminium and Polycarbonate Gazebo is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Does it include netting or curtains?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: No, netting and curtains are sold separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 295 x W 360 x D 360 cm and weighs 82 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015620325672,"sku":"Item #183686","price":898.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-palermo-3-6-x-3-6m-aluminium-gazebo-1.webp?v=1793111056"},{"product_id":"palram-palermo-gazebo-3m","title":"Palram Canopia Palermo 9ft 8\" x 9ft 8\" (3 x 3m) Aluminium and Polycarbonate Gazebo","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalram Canopia Palermo 9ft 8\" x 9ft 8\" (3 x 3m) Aluminium and Polycarbonate Gazebo\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Canopia Palermo 3 x 3m (9ft 8in square) Aluminium and Polycarbonate Gazebo creates a comfortable, shaded retreat in your garden. It is a hardtop open gazebo with a sturdy aluminium frame and matte grey roof panels that are UV protected on both sides, ideal for outdoor dining, entertaining or covering a hot tub.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCooler Shade on Sunny Days\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHeat Block Technology in the full-shade twin-wall roof stops the sun's rays shining through, keeping the space beneath cooler and more comfortable. The rust-resistant structure is built for year-round weather resistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAdd gazebo netting to keep insects out or curtains for privacy, both sold separately. Flooring is not included. It measures H 274 x W 295 x D 295 cm and weighs 66 kg. Assembly takes around 8 hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e3 x 3m:\u003c\/strong\u003e Aluminium frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePolycarbonate Roof:\u003c\/strong\u003e Twin-wall, full shade.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeat Block Technology:\u003c\/strong\u003e Cooler shade.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV Protected:\u003c\/strong\u003e Both sides.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePalermo Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIncludes Flooring\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCollection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalermo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDark Grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePalram Canopia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGarden Covers \u0026amp; Shades, Gazebo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 274 x W 295 x D 295 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e66 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Garden Dining and Hot Tubs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for shading a dining set, lounge area or hot tub.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMaterials\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAluminium frame with matte grey polycarbonate roof panels. Flooring not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreparing the Ground\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstall outdoor structures on firm, level ground such as paving slabs or a concrete base, and check local requirements before building near boundaries. Anchoring the structure securely helps it stand up to strong winds.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly Tips\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnpack and check all parts before starting, and allow plenty of time with at least two adults. Choose a dry, calm day for assembly and keep the instructions to hand throughout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSeasonal Care\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClear leaves and debris from roofs and gutters regularly and wash panels with mild soapy water and a soft brush. Check fixings each spring and autumn and tighten them if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGetting the Most From Your Outdoor Space\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA covered area lets you use the garden on drizzly days and long summer evenings alike. Add outdoor lighting, a patio heater or comfortable seating to turn it into a true outdoor room, and position it to make the most of views and evening sun.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Palram Canopia Palermo 9ft 8\" x 9ft 8\" (3 x 3m) Aluminium and Polycarbonate Gazebo is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Does it include netting or curtains?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: No, netting and curtains are sold separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 274 x W 295 x D 295 cm and weighs 66 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Palram","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015620555048,"sku":"Item #183684","price":748.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/palram-canopia-palermo-3-x-3m-hardtop-garden-gazebo-1.webp?v=1793111068"},{"product_id":"vitavia-vermont-5000-greenhouse","title":"Vitavia Vermont 5000 6ft 2\" x 8ft 5\" (2 x 2.6m) Greenhouse Package","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVitavia Vermont 5000 6ft 2\" x 8ft 5\" (2 x 2.6m) Greenhouse Package\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Vitavia Vermont 5000 6ft 2in x 8ft 5in (2 x 2.6m) Greenhouse Package is a complete greenhouse for gardeners of all experience levels. It comes with a steel perimeter base, toughened glass and a 1-tier staging table, giving you about 5 square metres of growing floor space plus extra room on the staging for pots and trays.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEverything You Need to Start Growing\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe silver aluminium frame resists the weather and needs little upkeep, while toughened safety glass lets in plenty of light for seedlings, tomatoes, chillies and tender plants. The included staging table gives you a handy potting and storage surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eReversible sliding doors can be hung to open left or right, ideal if the greenhouse sits next to a wall. The anodised aluminium structure with roof braces gives strength and stays looking smart, and the Vermont 5000 has been approved by the TUV standards authority. It measures H 1.92 x W 1.9 x L 2.6 m and weighs 176 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel Perimeter Base:\u003c\/strong\u003e Included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eToughened Glass:\u003c\/strong\u003e Safety glazing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e1-Tier Staging:\u003c\/strong\u003e Included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSliding Door:\u003c\/strong\u003e Easy access.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVitavia Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSilver\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVitavia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlass and aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreenhouse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 1.92 x W 1.9 x L 2.6 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e176 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 people, approx. 2 days\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlass Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eToughened\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArea Coverage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e48² ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.2 ft x 8.5 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInstallation Included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStaging Tables\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble Doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Keen and Beginner Gardeners\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for raising seedlings, growing salad and tomatoes, and overwintering tender plants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAllow 2 people, approx. 2 days. Installation is not included, and a firm, level base is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eChoosing the Right Spot\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSite your greenhouse in a sunny, sheltered spot, ideally with the ridge running east to west for even light through the day. Keep it away from overhanging trees and allow access space around it for cleaning and maintenance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBase and Assembly\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA level, firm base such as paving slabs or concrete is essential so the frame stays square and the doors slide smoothly. Assembly is a job for two people, and building on a calm, dry day makes handling glass panels easier and safer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGrowing Through the Seasons\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOpen the door and any vents on warm days to prevent overheating, and use shading in high summer. Clean the glass in autumn to let in maximum light over winter, when a greenhouse is ideal for overwintering tender plants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Vitavia Vermont 5000 6ft 2\" x 8ft 5\" (2 x 2.6m) Greenhouse Package is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is included?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: A steel perimeter base, toughened glass and a 1-tier staging table.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 1.92 x W 1.9 x L 2.6 m and weighs 176 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Vitavia","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015621079336,"sku":"Item #140570","price":638.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/vitavia-vermont-5000-glass-greenhouse-2-x-2-6m-1.webp?v=1793111080"},{"product_id":"vitavia-vermont-6200-greenhouse","title":"Vitavia Vermont 6200 6ft 2\" x 10ft 4\" (2 x 3.2 m) Greenhouse Package","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVitavia Vermont 6200 6ft 2\" x 10ft 4\" (2 x 3.2 m) Greenhouse Package\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Vitavia Vermont 6200 6ft 2in x 10ft 4in (2 x 3.2m) Greenhouse Package is a complete greenhouse for gardeners of all experience levels. It comes with a steel perimeter base, toughened glass and a 1-tier staging table, giving you about 6.2 square metres of growing floor space plus extra room on the staging for pots and trays.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEverything You Need to Start Growing\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe silver aluminium frame resists the weather and needs little upkeep, while toughened safety glass lets in plenty of light for seedlings, tomatoes, chillies and tender plants. The included staging table gives you a handy potting and storage surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA classic apex design gives strength and reliability, and the sliding door can be positioned on the left or right to suit your garden. Toughened glass is much stronger than horticultural glass and, if broken, breaks into small pieces that are less likely to cause injury. It measures H 1.97 x W 2 x L 3.2 m and weighs 210 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel Perimeter Base:\u003c\/strong\u003e Included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eToughened Glass:\u003c\/strong\u003e Safety glazing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e1-Tier Staging:\u003c\/strong\u003e Included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSliding Door:\u003c\/strong\u003e Easy access.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVitavia Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSilver\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVitavia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlass and aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreenhouse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 1.97 x W 2 x L 3.2 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e210 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.2ft x 10.4ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInstallation Included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlass Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eToughened Glass\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAnodised Aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStaging Tables\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble Doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 people, approx. 2 days\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArea Coverage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e69² ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Keen and Beginner Gardeners\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for raising seedlings, growing salad and tomatoes, and overwintering tender plants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAllow 2 people, approx. 2 days. Installation is not included, and a firm, level base is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eChoosing the Right Spot\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSite your greenhouse in a sunny, sheltered spot, ideally with the ridge running east to west for even light through the day. Keep it away from overhanging trees and allow access space around it for cleaning and maintenance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBase and Assembly\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA level, firm base such as paving slabs or concrete is essential so the frame stays square and the doors slide smoothly. Assembly is a job for two people, and building on a calm, dry day makes handling glass panels easier and safer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGrowing Through the Seasons\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOpen the door and any vents on warm days to prevent overheating, and use shading in high summer. Clean the glass in autumn to let in maximum light over winter, when a greenhouse is ideal for overwintering tender plants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Vitavia Vermont 6200 6ft 2\" x 10ft 4\" (2 x 3.2 m) Greenhouse Package is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is included?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: A steel perimeter base, toughened glass and a 1-tier staging table.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 1.97 x W 2 x L 3.2 m and weighs 210 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Vitavia","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015621439784,"sku":"Item #319755","price":698.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/vitavia-vermont-6200-glass-greenhouse-2-x-3-2m-1.webp?v=1793111090"},{"product_id":"vitavia-washington-3800-greenhouse","title":"Vitavia Washington 3800 6ft 2\" x 6ft 2\" (2 x 2 m) Greenhouse Package","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVitavia Washington 3800 6ft 2\" x 6ft 2\" (2 x 2 m) Greenhouse Package\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Vitavia Washington 3800 6ft 2in x 6ft 2in (2 x 2m) Greenhouse Package is a complete greenhouse for gardeners of all experience levels. It comes with a steel perimeter base, toughened glass and a 1-tier staging table, giving you 3.82 square metres of growing floor space plus extra room on the staging for pots and trays.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEverything You Need to Start Growing\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe green aluminium frame resists the weather and needs little upkeep, while toughened safety glass lets in plenty of light for seedlings, tomatoes, chillies and tender plants. The included staging table gives you a handy potting and storage surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAttractive curved eaves give extra growing height, and the curved sections are glazed with UV-protected acrylic panels. The smooth-action single sliding door can stay open in any position so you can control airflow. End caps for the integral gutters are not included. It measures H 2.3 x W 1.9 x L 1.9 m.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel Perimeter Base:\u003c\/strong\u003e Included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eToughened Glass:\u003c\/strong\u003e Safety glazing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e1-Tier Staging:\u003c\/strong\u003e Included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSliding Door:\u003c\/strong\u003e Easy access.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVitavia Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVitavia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlass and aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreenhouse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 2.3 x W 1.9 x L 1.9 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 people, approx 1 day\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlass Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eToughened\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArea Coverage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e36² ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.2 ft x 6.2 ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInstallation Included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStaging Tables\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble Doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Keen and Beginner Gardeners\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for raising seedlings, growing salad and tomatoes, and overwintering tender plants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAllow 2 people, approx. 1 day. Installation is not included, and a firm, level base is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eChoosing the Right Spot\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSite your greenhouse in a sunny, sheltered spot, ideally with the ridge running east to west for even light through the day. Keep it away from overhanging trees and allow access space around it for cleaning and maintenance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBase and Assembly\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA level, firm base such as paving slabs or concrete is essential so the frame stays square and the doors slide smoothly. Assembly is a job for two people, and building on a calm, dry day makes handling glass panels easier and safer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGrowing Through the Seasons\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOpen the door and any vents on warm days to prevent overheating, and use shading in high summer. Clean the glass in autumn to let in maximum light over winter, when a greenhouse is ideal for overwintering tender plants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Vitavia Washington 3800 6ft 2\" x 6ft 2\" (2 x 2 m) Greenhouse Package is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is included?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: A steel perimeter base, toughened glass and a 1-tier staging table.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 2.3 x W 1.9 x L 1.9 m.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Vitavia","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015621603624,"sku":"Item #154401","price":698.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/vitavia-washington-3800-greenhouse-2-x-2m-1.webp?v=1793111103"},{"product_id":"vitavia-washington-5000-greenhouse","title":"Vitavia Washington 5000 6ft 2\" x 8ft 2\" (1.9 x 2.6 m) Greenhouse Package","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVitavia Washington 5000 6ft 2\" x 8ft 2\" (1.9 x 2.6 m) Greenhouse Package\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Vitavia Washington 5000 6ft 2in x 8ft 2in (1.9 x 2.6m) Greenhouse Package is a complete greenhouse for gardeners of all experience levels. It comes with a steel perimeter base, toughened glass and a 1-tier staging table, giving you 5 square metres of growing floor space plus extra room on the staging for pots and trays.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEverything You Need to Start Growing\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe green aluminium frame resists the weather and needs little upkeep, while toughened safety glass lets in plenty of light for seedlings, tomatoes, chillies and tender plants. The included staging table gives you a handy potting and storage surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAttractive curved eaves give extra growing height, and the curved sections are glazed with UV-protected acrylic panels. The smooth-action single sliding door can stay open in any position so you can regulate airflow. It measures H 2.3 x W 1.93 x D 2.57 m.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel Perimeter Base:\u003c\/strong\u003e Included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eToughened Glass:\u003c\/strong\u003e Safety glazing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e1-Tier Staging:\u003c\/strong\u003e Included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSliding Door:\u003c\/strong\u003e Easy access.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVitavia Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6ft x 8ft\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInstallation Included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlass Type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eToughened\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame Material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 people, approx 1 day\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStaging Tables\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble Doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreen\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVitavia\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGlass and aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGreenhouse\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 2.3 x W 1.93 x D 2.57 m\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Keen and Beginner Gardeners\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for raising seedlings, growing salad and tomatoes, and overwintering tender plants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAllow 2 people, approx. 1 day. Installation is not included, and a firm, level base is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eChoosing the Right Spot\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSite your greenhouse in a sunny, sheltered spot, ideally with the ridge running east to west for even light through the day. Keep it away from overhanging trees and allow access space around it for cleaning and maintenance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBase and Assembly\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA level, firm base such as paving slabs or concrete is essential so the frame stays square and the doors slide smoothly. Assembly is a job for two people, and building on a calm, dry day makes handling glass panels easier and safer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGrowing Through the Seasons\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOpen the door and any vents on warm days to prevent overheating, and use shading in high summer. Clean the glass in autumn to let in maximum light over winter, when a greenhouse is ideal for overwintering tender plants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Vitavia Washington 5000 6ft 2\" x 8ft 2\" (1.9 x 2.6 m) Greenhouse Package is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is included?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: A steel perimeter base, toughened glass and a 1-tier staging table.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 2.3 x W 1.93 x D 2.57 m.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Vitavia","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015621833000,"sku":"Item #327319","price":878.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/vitavia-washington-5000-greenhouse-1-9-x-2-6m-1.webp?v=1793111114"},{"product_id":"keter-evotech-6x4-storage-shed","title":"Keter Evotech 6ft 2\" x 4ft (1.9 x 1.2m) Storage Shed","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeter Evotech 6ft 2\" x 4ft (1.9 x 1.2m) Storage Shed\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Keter Evotech 6ft 2in x 4ft (1.9 x 1.2m) Storage Shed is built from double-walled tongue and groove panels in Keter's Evotech material, which gives the look of real wood with the low maintenance of resin. Wide double doors make it easy to store mowers, garden tools and outdoor equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWood Look Without the Upkeep\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe weather-resistant design never needs painting or treating. Two Victorian-style windows and a skylight roof panel let in natural light, built-in ventilation panels improve airflow and a lock hasp adds security.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA heavy-duty floor is included, and a level base is required. Internal dimensions are H 212 x W 176 x D 113cm and the footprint is W 183 x D 121.5cm. It weighs 57kg. Shelves are available separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e1.9 x 1.2m:\u003c\/strong\u003e Including eaves.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEvotech Panels:\u003c\/strong\u003e Wood look, resin build.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFloor Included:\u003c\/strong\u003e Heavy duty.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWindows and Skylight:\u003c\/strong\u003e Natural light.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeter Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKeter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic Shed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e57kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelves Included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo (available to purchase separately)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInternal Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 212 x W 176 x D 113cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExternal Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 221 x W 190 x D 1226cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFootprint\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 183 x D 121.5cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Tools, Mowers and Bikes\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for garden tools, lawnmowers and outdoor equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInternal Dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eH 212 x W 176 x D 113cm. Footprint W 183 x D 121.5cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreparing a Level Base\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA solid, level base such as concrete or paving slabs is essential for any shed. It keeps the doors aligned, the floor stable and prevents water pooling underneath.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOrganising Your Shed\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore heavy items such as mowers near the doors and use wall hooks, shelves and racks to keep tools off the floor. Keep fuels and garden chemicals in sealed containers, well away from children.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLooking After Your Shed\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWash plastic and resin panels with mild soapy water once or twice a year and clear debris from the roof. Check the doors and fixings periodically and keep vents clear to reduce condensation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Keter Evotech 6ft 2\" x 4ft (1.9 x 1.2m) Storage Shed is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is a floor included?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Yes, a heavy-duty floor is included. A level base is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Internal H 212 x W 176 x D 113cm; footprint W 183 x D 121.5cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Keter","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015622586664,"sku":"Item #652038","price":398.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/keter-evotech-6x4-garden-storage-shed-with-floor-1.webp?v=1793111137"},{"product_id":"lifetime-7x7-outdoor-storage-shed","title":"Lifetime 7ft x 7ft (2.1 x 2.1m) Outdoor Storage Shed - Model 60527","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLifetime 7ft x 7ft (2.1 x 2.1m) Outdoor Storage Shed - Model 60527\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Lifetime 7ft x 7ft (2.1 x 2.1m) Outdoor Storage Shed, model 60527, gives you 3.9m² of interior floor space for garden equipment without overwhelming your garden. It is made from UV and weather resistant high-density polyethylene (HDPE) with dual-wall, steel-reinforced construction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBright, Airy and Built to Last\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eExtra-large ridge skylights and door windows bring in plenty of natural light, and screened vents provide fresh air. The stain and impact-resistant floor is included, and the shed needs no staining or painting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLockable doors (lock not included) keep contents secure, and a height-adjustable shelf is included. It measures H 226 x W 214.3 x D 214.3cm and weighs 163kg. Assembly takes 3 adults 5 to 10 hours, and a level base is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e7ft x 7ft:\u003c\/strong\u003e 3.9m² inside.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHDPE Panels:\u003c\/strong\u003e UV and weather resistant.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel Reinforced:\u003c\/strong\u003e Dual-wall build.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eShelf Included:\u003c\/strong\u003e Height adjustable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLifetime Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifetime\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic Shed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 226 x W 214.3 x D 214.3cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e163kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSmall\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssembly Time\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 adults, 5 - 10 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInterior Capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e42.3ft² (3.9m²)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Larger Garden Kit\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for mowers, bikes, garden furniture cushions and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e3 adults, 5 to 10 hours. Level base required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreparing a Level Base\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA solid, level base such as concrete or paving slabs is essential for any shed. It keeps the doors aligned, the floor stable and prevents water pooling underneath.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOrganising Your Shed\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore heavy items such as mowers near the doors and use wall hooks, shelves and racks to keep tools off the floor. Keep fuels and garden chemicals in sealed containers, well away from children.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLooking After Your Shed\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWash plastic and resin panels with mild soapy water once or twice a year and clear debris from the roof. Check the doors and fixings periodically and keep vents clear to reduce condensation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKeeping Contents Dry\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGood airflow helps reduce condensation, so keep vents clear and avoid storing damp items such as wet cushions or freshly used mowers without letting them dry first. Raising stored items off the floor on shelves or pallets adds extra protection.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Lifetime 7ft x 7ft (2.1 x 2.1m) Outdoor Storage Shed - Model 60527 is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is a shelf included?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Yes, a height-adjustable shelf is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 226 x W 214.3 x D 214.3cm and weighs 163kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lifetime","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015622979880,"sku":"Item #641518","price":798.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/lifetime-7x7ft-outdoor-storage-shed-60527-1.webp?v=1793111149"},{"product_id":"lifetime-rough-cut-storage-shed","title":"Lifetime 7ft x 9ft 6\" (2.1x 2.9m) Rough Cut Storage Shed - Model 60310","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLifetime 7ft x 9ft 6\" (2.1x 2.9m) Rough Cut Storage Shed - Model 60310\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Lifetime 7ft x 9ft 6in (2.1 x 2.9m) Rough Cut Storage Shed, model 60310, is a spacious storage building with a skylight that runs the full length of the roof to maximise natural light. Walls are made from steel-reinforced dual-wall polyethylene panels, and the roof is supported by heavy-duty steel trusses.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEasy Access and Secure Storage\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSingle-hinged double doors open nearly 180 degrees, with high impact handles, a metal slider latch, full-length galvanised steel hinge pins, an exterior padlock loop and two interior deadbolts. A slip-resistant polyethylene floor is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe HDPE construction is UV protected and low maintenance, with a wood grain finish. Shelves and a window are included. Internal dimensions are H 178-224 x W 198 x D 270 cm and external dimensions H 227 x W 214 x D 285 cm including eaves. It weighs 193kg, and a level base is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e7ft x 9ft 6in:\u003c\/strong\u003e Spacious storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFull-Length Skylight:\u003c\/strong\u003e Natural light.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel Reinforced:\u003c\/strong\u003e Dual-wall panels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFloor and Shelves:\u003c\/strong\u003e Included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLifetime Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifetime\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePlastic Shed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e193kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInstallation Included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWindow\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShelves Included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eInternal Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 178-224 x W 198 x D 270 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExternal Dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 227 x W 214 x D 285 cm (including eaves)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Larger Gardens\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for mowers, bikes, garden furniture and DIY equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInternal Dimensions\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eH 178-224 x W 198 x D 270 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreparing a Level Base\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA solid, level base such as concrete or paving slabs is essential for any shed. It keeps the doors aligned, the floor stable and prevents water pooling underneath.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOrganising Your Shed\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore heavy items such as mowers near the doors and use wall hooks, shelves and racks to keep tools off the floor. Keep fuels and garden chemicals in sealed containers, well away from children.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLooking After Your Shed\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWash plastic and resin panels with mild soapy water once or twice a year and clear debris from the roof. Check the doors and fixings periodically and keep vents clear to reduce condensation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Lifetime 7ft x 9ft 6\" (2.1x 2.9m) Rough Cut Storage Shed - Model 60310 is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is a floor included?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Yes, a slip-resistant polyethylene floor is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: External H 227 x W 214 x D 285 cm including eaves; internal H 178-224 x W 198 x D 270 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lifetime","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015623274792,"sku":"Item #289838","price":998.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/lifetime-7x9-5ft-rough-cut-storage-shed-60310-1.webp?v=1793111161"},{"product_id":"sunvilla-louvred-wall-panel-3-7m","title":"Sunvilla 7ft 6\" x 12ft 2\" (2.3 x 3.7m) Fixed Louvered Wall Panel","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSunvilla 7ft 6\" x 12ft 2\" (2.3 x 3.7m) Fixed Louvered Wall Panel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Sunvilla Fixed Louvred Wall Panel (2.3 x 3.7m) is a powder-coated aluminium side panel in a contemporary matt grey finish, designed for use with the Sunvilla Full Electric 3m x 4m Pergola with LED. It turns an open pergola into a more sheltered, private outdoor room.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAir and Light With Added Shelter\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe fixed louvres let fresh air and light flow through while offering protection from the elements, so you can create a comfortable entertaining area or a private space to relax whatever the weather.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe panel measures H 229 x W 371 x D 6 cm, with a net weight of 73.4kg. To clean, use a soft damp cloth followed by a soft dry cloth, and avoid bleach or abrasive cleaners.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e2.3 x 3.7m Panel:\u003c\/strong\u003e Full side coverage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePowder-Coated Aluminium:\u003c\/strong\u003e Matt grey.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFixed Louvres:\u003c\/strong\u003e Air and light flow.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePergola Compatible:\u003c\/strong\u003e Sunvilla 3m x 4m.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSunvilla Specifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMatt Grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSunvilla\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePergola Accessory\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 229 x W 371 x D 6 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNett: 73.4kg, Gross: 80.7kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor Pergola Owners\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIdeal for adding privacy and wind shelter to one side of a Sunvilla pergola.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor use with the Sunvilla Full Electric 3m x 4m Pergola including LED.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePreparing the Ground\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstall outdoor structures on firm, level ground such as paving slabs or a concrete base, and check local requirements before building near boundaries. Anchoring the structure securely helps it stand up to strong winds.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAssembly Tips\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnpack and check all parts before starting, and allow plenty of time with at least two adults. Choose a dry, calm day for assembly and keep the instructions to hand throughout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSeasonal Care\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eClear leaves and debris from roofs and gutters regularly and wash panels with mild soapy water and a soft brush. Check fixings each spring and autumn and tighten them if needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGetting the Most From Your Outdoor Space\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA covered area lets you use the garden on drizzly days and long summer evenings alike. Add outdoor lighting, a patio heater or comfortable seating to turn it into a true outdoor room, and position it to make the most of views and evening sun.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReady to Ship\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Sunvilla 7ft 6\" x 12ft 2\" (2.3 x 3.7m) Fixed Louvered Wall Panel is in stock at Garden N Outdoor with quick UK delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Which pergola does it fit?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It is designed for the Sunvilla Full Electric 3m x 4m Pergola including LED.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What are the dimensions?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures H 229 x W 371 x D 6 cm and weighs Nett: 73.4kg, Gross: 80.7kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How will it be delivered?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: We dispatch from UK stock with a dependable courier service for prompt UK arrival, with tracking provided. Please check doorways and stairs before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Sunvilla","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68015675179304,"sku":"Item #586597","price":898.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/sunvilla-louvred-pergola-wall-panel-2-3-x-3-7m-1.webp?v=1793111753"},{"product_id":"lifetime-6ft-folding-picnic-table","title":"Lifetime 6 Foot Classic Folding Picnic Table, Brown Wood Grain","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNeed extra outdoor seating that packs away flat? Is the Lifetime 6 Foot Folding Picnic Table the answer?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis Lifetime picnic table seats up to 8 people and folds completely flat for storage. The brown tabletop has a wood grain texture.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt has a built-in umbrella hole with a cap. The umbrella is not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy Choose the Lifetime 6 Foot Folding Picnic Table\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWooden picnic tables need sanding and treating every year. This table uses UV-protected polyethylene and powder-coated steel, so it will not fade, crack, chip or peel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe stain-resistant top wipes clean after meals outdoors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSeats up to 8:\u003c\/strong\u003e plenty of room for family meals.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFolds flat:\u003c\/strong\u003e easy to store in a shed or garage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeather resistant:\u003c\/strong\u003e UV-protected top and rust-resistant steel frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUmbrella hole:\u003c\/strong\u003e add your own parasol for shade.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLifetime\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eType\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFolding picnic table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh-density polyethylene and powder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeats\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 8\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e408 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 73.7 x W 144.8 x D 182.9 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e34.4 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrown wood grain\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCare Tips\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWipe the top with warm soapy water and dry with a soft cloth.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFold the table flat and store it under cover during winter to extend its life.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSet it on level ground so all the bench seats sit evenly. Fit a parasol through the umbrella hole on sunny days.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock Now\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOrder the Lifetime 6 Foot Folding Picnic Table from Garden N Outdoor today for fast-tracked UK transit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How many people does the Lifetime 6 Foot Folding Picnic Table seat?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It seats up to 8 people and holds up to 408 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Does it come with an umbrella?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: No. It has an umbrella hole and cap, but the umbrella is sold separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: When will my table arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It is sent with swift UK dispatch, with tracking details by email.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Lifetime","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68076408013096,"sku":"Item #300516","price":173.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/lifetime-6ft-folding-picnic-table-1.webp?v=1793618879"},{"product_id":"bramblecrest-milan-5-piece-dining-set","title":"Bramblecrest Milan 5 Piece Cast Aluminium Garden Dining Set with Parasol","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWant a garden dining set that stays outside all season? Is the Bramblecrest Milan 5 Piece Dining Set the one?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis set includes a square table, four stackable armchairs, a parasol and a parasol base. It is made from cast aluminium with lattice detailing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose black or stone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy Choose the Bramblecrest Milan 5 Piece Dining Set\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSteel and wooden sets need covering or treating to stop rust and rot. Cast aluminium will not rust, so this set can stay outside all season with little care.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSeason-proof Eco Clay cushions are UV-resistant for lasting comfort.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCast aluminium frame:\u003c\/strong\u003e lightweight and will not rust.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStackable armchairs:\u003c\/strong\u003e save space when not in use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEco cushions:\u003c\/strong\u003e season-proof and UV-resistant.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eParasol and base included:\u003c\/strong\u003e shade for sunny afternoons.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBramblecrest\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRange\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMilan\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePieces\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 armchairs, 1 table, 1 parasol, 1 parasol base\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeats\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCast aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 73 x W 100 x D 100 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChair size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 93.5 x W 55 x D 55 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChair weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable weight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack, Stone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable options\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack, Stone\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCare Tips\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWipe the frames with mild soapy water and rinse to keep the finish looking fresh.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBring the cushions in during long wet spells to keep them dry.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock Now\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bramblecrest Milan 5 Piece Dining Set is in stock at Garden N Outdoor, ready for quickly shipped across the uk.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: What is included in the Bramblecrest Milan 5 Piece Dining Set?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: You get four armchairs, a square table, a parasol and a parasol base.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Can it stay outside all year?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: Yes. The aluminium frame will not rust and the set needs very little care.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How soon will my set arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It is sent with rapid mainland delivery, and tracking details follow by email.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Bramblecrest","offers":[{"title":"Black","offer_id":68076413518120,"sku":"Item #688895","price":898.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true},{"title":"Stone","offer_id":68076413550888,"sku":"Item #688898","price":898.98,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/bramblecrest-milan-5-piece-dining-set-1.webp?v=1793618895"},{"product_id":"sojag-del-ray-12x12-gazebo","title":"Sojag Del Ray 12ft x 12ft Shade Gazebo, Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLooking for reliable shade on the patio? Is the Sojag Del Ray 12x12 Gazebo the answer?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis 12ft x 12ft gazebo has a UV-protected, water-resistant 300D polyester cover. The powder-coated steel frame resists rust and corrosion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe charcoal frame and grey cover suit most gardens.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhy Choose the Sojag Del Ray 12x12 Gazebo\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ePop-up canopies can buckle in a breeze. The Del Ray uses bolted connections and spike anchors for extra stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBungee fastenings make the cover quick to fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKey Features\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12ft x 12ft cover:\u003c\/strong\u003e shade for a full patio set.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUV-protected polyester:\u003c\/strong\u003e water-resistant 300D fabric.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePowder-coated steel:\u003c\/strong\u003e rust and corrosion resistant.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStable build:\u003c\/strong\u003e bolted joints and spike anchors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSpecifications\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003cthead\u003e\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttribute\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\u003c\/thead\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrand\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSojag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eModel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDel Ray\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSize\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12ft x 12ft (3.7 x 3.7 m)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300D polyester, UV-protected, water-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eH 250 x W 373 x D 378 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e31 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColour\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey cover, charcoal frame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSetup Tips\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBuild it on level ground and secure every leg with the spike anchors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTake the cover down before very strong winds or heavy snow.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAsk a second person to help when lifting the roof frame into place. Brush leaves and water off the top so the cover dries quickly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIn Stock Now\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGarden N Outdoor has the Sojag Del Ray 12x12 Gazebo in stock now, sent out with dependable courier service.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFAQs\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: How big is the Sojag Del Ray 12x12 Gazebo?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It measures 3.7 x 3.7 m and stands 250 cm tall.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: Is the cover waterproof?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: The 300D polyester cover is water-resistant and UV-protected.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQ: When will my gazebo arrive?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA: It is sent with fast-tracked UK transit, with tracking details by email.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Sojag","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":68076418040104,"sku":"Item #1934009","price":198.99,"currency_code":"GBP","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/1007\/5455\/5176\/files\/sojag-del-ray-12x12-gazebo-1.webp?v=1793618912"}],"url":"https:\/\/www.gardennoutdoor.co.uk\/collections\/patio-outdoor-living.oembed?page=2","provider":"Garden n Outdoor UK","version":"1.0","type":"link"}